Chapter 95 - Instrument System: BHT-430-MM-10

BHT-430-MM-10
CHAPTER 95 — INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

Number Title Number Number
INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
95-1 Instrument System ......................................................................... 95-00-00 9

95-2 Instrument System — Removal ................................................ 95-00-00 9
95-3 Instrument System — Inspection.............................................. 95-00-00 9
95-4 Instrument System — Repair or Replacement ......................... 95-00-00 9
95-5 Instrument System — Installation ............................................. 95-00-00 10
95-6 Glareshield................................................................................ 95-00-00 10
95-7 Glareshield — Removal .................................................... 95-00-00 10
95-8 Glareshield — Installation ................................................. 95-00-00 10
95-9 Instrument Panel....................................................................... 95-00-00 10
95-10 Pilot Instrument Panel — Removal ................................... 95-00-00 11
95-11 Pilot Instrument Panel — Installation ................................ 95-00-00 11
95-12 Copilot Instrument Panel — Removal ............................... 95-00-00 11
95-13 Copilot Instrument Panel — Installation............................ 95-00-00 11
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM
95-14 Pitot Static Systems ....................................................................... 95-00-00 15

95-15 Pilot Pitot System...................................................................... 95-00-00 15
95-16 Auxiliary System Pitot Static Switch ......................................... 95-00-00 15
95-17 Copilot Pitot System ................................................................. 95-00-00 15
95-18 Pilot Static System.................................................................... 95-00-00 15
95-19 Copilot Static System................................................................ 95-00-00 15
95-20 Alternative Static Air Source Switch ......................................... 95-00-00 15
95-21 Pitot Static System — Visual Inspection................................... 95-00-00 18
95-22 Pitot Static System — Draining................................................. 95-00-00 18
95-23 Pilot Pitot Static System — Leak Test ...................................... 95-00-00 18
95-24 Copilot Pitot Static System — Leak Test .................................. 95-00-00 21
95-25 Pitot Static Heater..................................................................... 95-00-00 23
95-26 Pitot Static Heater — Operational Check.......................... 95-00-00 23
95-27 Pitot Tube ................................................................................. 95-00-00 32
95-28 Pitot Tube — Removal...................................................... 95-00-00 32
95-29 Pitot Tube — Installation................................................... 95-00-00 32
95-30 Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure Switch.......................... 95-00-00 32
95-31 Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure Switch
— Removal ....................................................................... 95-00-00 32
— Installation .................................................................... 95-00-00 32
— Operational Check........................................................ 95-00-00 34
95-34 Air Data Computer .................................................................... 95-00-00 36
FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
95-35 Flight Instruments .......................................................................... 95-00-00 37
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 1
BHT-430-MM-10
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

95-36 Basic Helicopter (Electro- mechanical Instruments) ................. 95-00-00 37

95-37 Dual-Pilot IFR Helicopter (Electro- mechanical Instruments) ... 95-00-00 37
95-38 Single-Pilot IFR Helicopter (Electronic Flight Instrument
System)..................................................................................... 95-00-00 37
95-39 Dual-Pilot IFR Helicopter (Electronic Flight Instrument
System)..................................................................................... 95-00-00 38
95-40 Airspeed Indicators ................................................................... 95-00-00 38
95-41 Airspeed Indicators — Operational Check........................ 95-00-00 38
95-42 Altimeter Indicators ................................................................... 95-00-00 38
95-43 Altimeter Indicators — Operational Check........................ 95-00-00 38
95-44 Encoding Altimeter.................................................................... 95-00-00 41
95-45 Encoding Altimeter — Operational Check ........................ 95-00-00 41
95-46 Encoding Altimeter — Troubleshooting ............................ 95-00-00 41
95-47 Altitude and Vertical Speed Indicator........................................ 95-00-00 41
95-48 Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator (ALT/VSI) ...................... 95-00-00 41
95-49 Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator — Removal ................... 95-00-00 44
95-50 Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator —Installation ................. 95-00-00 44
95-51 ALT/VSI Power-Up Test.................................................... 95-00-00 44
95-52 ALT/VSI Self-Test (Below 50 Knots)................................. 95-00-00 45
95-53 ALT/VSI Self-Test (Above 50 Knots) ................................ 95-00-00 45
95-54 Pilot and Copilot Vertical Speed Indicators............................... 95-00-00 45
95-55 Pilot and Copilot Vertical Speed Indicators
95-56 Pilot and Copilot Vertical Speed Indicators
— Troubleshooting............................................................ 95-00-00 47
95-57 Pilot and Copilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator .................................. 95-00-00 47
95-58 Pilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator (if installed) .......................... 95-00-00 47
95-59 Copilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator ......................................... 95-00-00 47
95-60 Turn-and-Slip Indicator — Operational Check .................. 95-00-00 47
95-61 Attitude Indicator (Electro- mechanical).................................... 95-00-00 51
95-62 Attitude Indicator Operational Check — Pilot.................... 95-00-00 51
95-63 Attitude Indicator Operational Check — Copilot ............... 95-00-00 51
95-64 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator................................................. 95-00-00 54
95-65 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Normal Operation....... 95-00-00 58
95-66 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Emergency
Operation (Failure of Normal 28 VDC Power) .................. 95-00-00 59
95-67 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Removal ..................... 95-00-00 59
95-68 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Inspection................... 95-00-00 59
95-69 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Installation .................. 95-00-00 59
95-70 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Operational Check ..... 95-00-00 61
95-71 Pilot Standby Attitude Battery Power Suppl
— Removal ...................................................................... 95-00-00 68
95-72 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator Battery — Installation...... 95-00-00 68
95-73 Pilot Standby Attitude Battery Power Supply
95-00-00
Page 2 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10

NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS
95-74 Navigation Instruments .................................................................. 95-00-00 71

95-75 Standby Magnetic Compass..................................................... 95-00-00 71
95-76 Standby Magnetic Compass — Removal ......................... 95-00-00 71
95-77 Standby Magnetic Compass — Inspection ....................... 95-00-00 71
95-78 Standby Magnetic Compass — Repair or Replacement .. 95-00-00 71
95-79 Standby Magnetic Compass — Installation ...................... 95-00-00 71
95-80 Standby Magnetic Compass — Troubleshooting.............. 95-00-00 71
95-81 Standby Magnetic Compass Calibration — Compass
Rose Method..................................................................... 95-00-00 73
95-82 Standby Magnetic Compass Index Error Chart ................ 95-00-00 73
95-83 Standby Magnetic Compass Calibration — Sight
Compass Method.............................................................. 95-00-00 74
95-84 Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator ............................................. 95-00-00 75
95-85 Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator — Operational Check .. 95-00-00 77
95-86 Course Deviation Indicators...................................................... 95-00-00 77
95-87 Course Deviation Indicators — Operational Check .......... 95-00-00 77
95-88 Course Deviation Indicators — Troubleshooting .............. 95-00-00 80
95-89 Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS).............................. 95-00-00 80
95-90 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) ............... 95-00-00 80
95-91 Electronic Attitude Direction Indicator (EADI) ................... 95-00-00 80
INTEGRATED INSTRUMENT DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)
95-92 Integrated Instrument Display System (IIDS)................................. 95-00-00 81

95-93 Description................................................................................ 95-00-00 81
95-94 IIDS Functional Keys ................................................................ 95-00-00 90
95-95 IIDS Flight Display Formats ...................................................... 95-00-00 90
95-96 IIDS Primary Flight Display ............................................... 95-00-00 92
95-97 IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Page 1 ......................... 95-00-00 92
95-98 IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Page 2 ......................... 95-00-00 92
95-99 IIDS Secondary Display Formats — Start Page ............... 95-00-00 92
95-100 IIDS Composite Mode Display .......................................... 95-00-00 92
95-101 IIDS Built-In-Test (BIT) ............................................................. 95-00-00 92
95-102 IIDS Failure Annunciation ......................................................... 95-00-00 93
95-103 Resetting the IIDS..................................................................... 95-00-00 94
95-104 RESET/REBOOT of IIDS Primary (RH) Screen ....................... 95-00-00 95
95-105 RESET/REBOOT of IIDS Secondary (LH) Screen ................... 95-00-00 104
95-106 IIDS — Removal ............................................................... 95-00-00 106
95-107 IIDS — Installation (After Removal for Access to the
Rear of Instrument Panel)................................................. 95-00-00 106
95-108 IIDS — Installation (After Replacement) ........................... 95-00-00 106
95-109 IIDS Display Unit Screen — Cleaning ...................................... 95-00-00 107
95-110 IIDS Display Unit — Operational Check ................................... 95-00-00 107
95-111 IIDS Maintenance Formats ....................................................... 95-00-00 108
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 1 SEP 2009 Rev. 17 Page 3
BHT-430-MM-10

95-112 Power Assurance Check Screen ...................................... 95-00-00 110

95-113 Engine Data ...................................................................... 95-00-00 110
95-114 Accessing the IIDS Engine Data Screen .......................... 95-00-00 110
95-115 Uploading Engine Data to the IIDS ................................... 95-00-00 144
95-116 ECU-Engine Fault Monitor Screen (P/N 430-375-001-105
and -109) / ECU-Engine System Status Screen
(P/N 430-375-001-107, -111 and -113)............................. 95-00-00 145
95-117 Accessing IIDS ECU-Engine Fault Monitor Screen
(P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) / ECU-Engine System
Status Screen (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111 and -113) ..... 95-00-00 145
95-118 Downloading the ECU-Engine Fault Monitor Screen........ 95-00-00 146
95-119 Clearing ECU-Engine Fault IIDS Non-Volatile Memory .... 95-00-00 147
95-120 Engine Exceedances Screen............................................ 95-00-00 148
95-121 Exceedances Monitored on P/N 430-375-001-105
and -109 IIDS Displays ..................................................... 95-00-00 148
95-122 Exceedances Monitored on P/N 430-375-001-107
-111 and -113 IIDS Displays ............................................ 95-00-00 149
95-123 Accessing the Engine Exceedance Screen ...................... 95-00-00 149
95-124 Downloading the IIDS Engine Exceedance Screen.......... 95-00-00 150
95-125 Clearing Engine Exceedance Data IIDS Non-Volatile
Memory ............................................................................. 95-00-00 151
95-126 IIDS Revision-Faults Monitor Screen................................ 95-00-00 152
95-127 Accessing the IIDS Revision-Faults Screen ..................... 95-00-00 153
95-128 Downloading the IIDS Faults Screen ................................ 95-00-00 153
95-129 Clearing IIDS Faults Data from the IIDS Non-Volatile
Memory ............................................................................. 95-00-00 154
95-130 Engine History Screen ...................................................... 95-00-00 155
95-131 Accessing the Engine History Maintenance Screen ......... 95-00-00 159
95-132 Downloading the Engine History Screen .......................... 95-00-00 161
95-133 Clearing Engine History Data IIDS Non-Volatile Memory . 95-00-00 162
95-134 Parameter Set-Up ............................................................. 95-00-00 163
95-135 Fuel Calibration Display .................................................... 95-00-00 163
95-136 Configuration Display........................................................ 95-00-00 163
95-137 Mast Torque Calibration.................................................... 95-00-00 163
95-138 Engine Torque Indicating Systems ........................................... 95-00-00 163
95-139 Engine-Mounted Torque Transducers — Operational
Check................................................................................ 95-00-00 166
95-140 Airframe-Mounted Torque Transducers — Operational
Check................................................................................ 95-00-00 167
95-141 Mast Torque Indicating System ................................................ 95-00-00 169
95-142 Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) 95-00-00 173
95-143 Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111
and -113).......................................................................... 95-00-00 174
95-144 Mast Torque Indicating System — Operational Check ..... 95-00-00 175
95-145 Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating System.................. 95-00-00 178
95-146 Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating System
95-00-00
Page 4 Rev. 21 31 DEC 2019 Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99
BHT-430-MM-10

95-147 Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating System

— Magnetic Pick-up Maintenance .................................... 95-00-00 181
95-148 Engine Speed (NP) Indicating System ..................................... 95-00-00 181
95-149 Engine Speed (NP) Indicating System — Operational
Check................................................................................ 95-00-00 182
95-150 Rotor (NR) Indicating System.................................................... 95-00-00 185
95-151 Rotor (NR) Indicating System — Operational Check ........ 95-00-00 185
95-152 Rotor (NR) Indicating System — Maintenance ................. 95-00-00 186
95-153 Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Indicating System............ 95-00-00 186
95-154 Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Indicating System
95-155 Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) Indicating System
— Maintenance................................................................. 95-00-00 191
95-156 Engine Oil Pressure Indicating System .................................... 95-00-00 191
95-157 Engine Oil Pressure Indicating System — Operational
Check................................................................................ 95-00-00 192
95-158 Engine Oil Temperature Indicating System .............................. 95-00-00 193
95-159 Engine Oil Temperature Indicating System
95-160 Hydraulic Oil Pressure Indicating System................................. 95-00-00 195
95-161 Hydraulic Oil Pressure Indicating System
95-162 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicating System .......................... 95-00-00 198
95-163 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicating System
95-164 Transmission Oil Pressure Indicating System .......................... 95-00-00 199
95-165 Transmission Oil Pressure Indicating System
95-166 Transmission Oil Temperature Indicating System .................... 95-00-00 200
95-167 Transmission Oil Temperature Indicating System
95-168 Fuel Quantity Indicating System ............................................... 95-00-00 202
95-169 Fuel Quantity Indicating System — Operational Check.... 95-00-00 205
95-170 Fuel Quantity Indicating System — Operational Check
(No Test Equipment Required) ......................................... 95-00-00 205
95-171 Fuel Quantity Indicating System — Operational Check
(Using Test Equipment) .................................................... 95-00-00 206
95-172 Fuel Quantity Indicating System — Removal and
Installation......................................................................... 95-00-00 209
95-173 Fuel Calibration................................................................. 95-00-00 209
95-174 Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105
and -109 Only) .......................................................... 95-00-00 209
95-175 Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111
and -113 Only) — Fill Tank Method .......................... 95-00-00 212
95-175A Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111,
and -113 Only) — Manual Edit Method ..................... 95-00-00 216
95-176 Fuel Temperature Indicating System........................................ 95-00-00 217
95-00-00
Export Classification C, ECCN EAR99 31 DEC 2019 Rev. 21 Page 5
BHT-430-MM-10

95-177 Fuel Temperature Indicating System

95-178 Generator DC Ammeter Indicating System .............................. 95-00-00 218
95-179 Generator DC Ammeter Indicating System
95-180 Generator DC Ammeter Indicating System
95-181 Generator DC Voltmeter Indicating System.............................. 95-00-00 219
95-182 Generator DC Voltmeter Indicating System
95-183 Generator DC Voltmeter Indicating System
95-184 Battery Voltmeter Indicating System......................................... 95-00-00 219
95-185 Battery Voltmeter Indicating System — Operational
Check................................................................................ 95-00-00 219
95-186 Battery Voltmeter Indicating System —Troubleshooting .. 95-00-00 219
95-187 AC Inverter Voltmeter Indicating System.................................. 95-00-00 219
95-188 AC Inverter Voltmeter Indicating System
95-189 AC Inverter Voltmeter Indicating System
95-190 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Indicating System .................. 95-00-00 220
95-191 Changing OAT Parameters............................................... 95-00-00 220
95-192 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Indicating System
95-193 OAT Bulb — Removal....................................................... 95-00-00 221
95-194 OAT Bulb — Inspection .................................................... 95-00-00 221
95-195 OAT Bulb — Installation.................................................... 95-00-00 221
95-196 Digital Clock Indicating System ................................................ 95-00-00 221
95-197 Setting the Time................................................................ 95-00-00 223
95-198 Setting the Date ................................................................ 95-00-00 223
95-199 Digital Clock Indicating System — Operational Check ..... 95-00-00 224
95-200 Clock Battery Power Supply — Operational Check .......... 95-00-00 224
FIGURES
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-1 Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (E/M and Kits) .......................................... 13

95-2 Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (EFIS and Kits)......................................... 14
95-3 Pitot System........................................................................................................ 16
95-4 Static System ...................................................................................................... 17
95-5 Pitot Static Heater System — Troubleshooting Charts ....................................... 25
95-6 Landing Gear Warning Horn Location Drawing .................................................. 33
95-7 Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure Switch — Troubleshooting Chart........... 35
95-8 Airspeed Indicator ............................................................................................... 39
95-9 Altimeter.............................................................................................................. 40
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-10 Encoding Altimeter.............................................................................................. 42

95-11 Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator......................................................................... 43
95-12 Vertical Speed Indicator...................................................................................... 46
95-13 Turn-and-Slip Indicator ....................................................................................... 48
95-14 Pilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts .................................... 49
95-15 Attitude Indicator ................................................................................................. 52
95-16 Pilot Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart................................................ 53
95-17 Copilot Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart............................................ 55
95-18 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator (S/N 49001 through 49060 with SAFCS).......... 56
95-19 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator (S/N 49001 through 49060 with DAFCS
and S/N 49061 and Subsequent)........................................................................ 57
95-20 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator System Installation (S/N 49001 through
49058 with SAFCS) ............................................................................................ 60
95-21 Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts ............................... 63
95-22 Standby Magnetic Compass ............................................................................... 72
95-23 Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator ....................................................................... 76
95-24 Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart .............................. 78
95-25 Course Deviation Indicator.................................................................................. 79
95-26 IIDS Block Diagram............................................................................................. 82
95-27 IIDS Primary Flight Display ................................................................................. 83
95-28 IIDS Secondary Flight Display ............................................................................ 84
95-29 IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Start Page...................................................... 86
95-30 IIDS Composite Mode Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109))...................... 88
95-31 IIDS Function Keys ............................................................................................. 91
95-32 IIDS Maintenance Functions Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109)............. 96
95-33 Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109).................... 98
95-34 Engine Data Display ........................................................................................... 103
95-35 Power Assurance Check Display........................................................................ 112
95-36 ECU — Engine Fault Monitor.............................................................................. 114
95-37 Engine Exceedances Display ............................................................................. 115
95-38 IIDS Faults Monitoring ........................................................................................ 118
95-39 Engine History Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109)................................... 120
95-40 Parameter Set-Up Display .................................................................................. 126
95-41 Fuel Calibration Display ...................................................................................... 130
95-42 LH Tank Fuel Calibration Page (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) ........... 133
95-43 RH Tank Fuel Calibration Page (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)........... 134
95-44 Configuration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109)..................................... 135
95-45 Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) ................................ 138
95-46 Harness, Maintenance — M430 ......................................................................... 143
95-47 OEI Event Profile (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) ........................................... 156
95-48 OEI Event Profile (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) ................................. 157
95-49 Torque OEI Usage (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 only) ................................. 158
95-50 MGT OEI Usage (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 only) .......................... 160
95-51 Engine Torque Indication System Block Diagram............................................... 164
95-52 Mast Torque Indicating System Block Diagram .................................................. 170
95-53 Mast Torque Strain Gauge Simulator/Breakout Box........................................... 176
95-54 Mast Torque Indicating System — Troubleshooting Chart ................................. 177
95-55 Engine Tachometer (NG/NP) Indicating System Block Diagram ......................... 179
95-56 Rotor Speed Indicating System Block Diagram .................................................. 184
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
FIGURES (CONT)
Figure Page
Number Title Number
95-57 MGT Indicating System Block Diagram .............................................................. 188

95-58 Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Block Diagram ....................................... 194
95-59 Hydraulic Oil Pressure and Temperature Block Diagram ................................... 197
95-60 Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicating System Block Diagram 201
95-61 Fuel Indicating System Block Diagram ............................................................... 203
95-62 Outside Air Temperature Bulb Installation .......................................................... 222
TABLES
Table Page
Number Title Number
95-1 Example of Deviations with Compensator Set to Null Effects............................. 74

95-2 IIDS Failure Annunciation ................................................................................... 93
95-3 IIDS Fault Codes................................................................................................. 93
95-4 IIDS Function Key Legends ................................................................................ 108
95-5 Constants Values................................................................................................ 171
95-6 Pylon Link Data................................................................................................... 172
95-7 Resistance Value for Engine Oil Temperature, Hydraulic Temperature,
Transmission Temperature, and Fuel Temperature Probes ............................... 193
95-8 Fuel Quantity — Full Indication (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only) ............. 211
95-9 Quantity Equivalent to 110 Pounds (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only) ....... 211
95-10 Full Adjustment Values (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only).......................... 212
95-11 Quantity Equivalent to 110 Pounds (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 Only) 215
95-12 Full Adjustment Values (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 Only) ............... 215
95-13 Fuel Density ........................................................................................................ 216
95-14 Outside Air Temperature Indication (°C) Versus Bulb Resistance (Ohms)
— For Reference Only ........................................................................................ 220
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
95-1. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM screws accessible on the panel face attach

the instruments.
The instrument systems on the Model 430 helicopter
include Electromechanical or Electronic Flight a. Loosen the clamp screw or remove the
Instrument Systems (EFIS), navigation, Integrated mounting screws that hold the instrument to the
Instrument Display Systems (IIDS), and miscellaneous instrument panel. Carefully remove the instrument.
instrument systems. The instrument panel contains all
of the instruments, except for the standby magnetic b. Carefully disconnect the electrical connectors
compass. and/or the piping from the instrument.
95-2. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — REMOVAL c. Seal any open piping and openings on the
instruments with a cap or plug.
1. To access the instrument panel, proceed as
follows: 95-3. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — INSPECTION
Examine the instrument for the conditions that follow:
CAUTION 1. Hardware that is loose, missing, or incorrectly

installed.
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER. 2. Scratches or cracks on cover glasses.
3. Incorrectly attached instruments.

CAUTION
4. Illegible range marks.
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO DELICATE

5. Defective decals.
GIMBAL MECHANISMS IN THE PILOT/
C O P I L O T AT T I T U D E I N D I C AT O R ,
COPILOT DIRECTIONAL GYROSCOPE, 6. Non-secure mounting.
O R P I L O T S TA N D B Y AT T I T U D E
I N D I C AT O R , D O N O T M O V E T H E 95-4. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — REPAIR OR
INDICATOR UNTIL THE GYROSCOPE REPLACEMENT
STOPS SPINNING (APPROXIMATELY 15
MINUTES AFTER POWER REMOVAL). 1. Send the instrument to an approved instrument
repair station for all instrument repairs and
replacement of instrument range marks.
NOTE
Most instruments are installed in the face of 2. Replace the instrument when it is inoperative,
the panel or through the rear of the panel. defective, damaged, or if the cover glass is loose,
Screws through flanges or clamps with broken, or has scratches or cracks.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 9
BHT-430-MM-10
95-5. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — INSTALLATION 95-7. Glareshield — Removal
CAUTION CAUTION
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER.

REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER
BEFORE INSTALLATION. 1. Remove wire L421A22 from RH glareshield
connector 8DS36P1 and wire L381A22N from
connector 8DS36P2. Seal the ends of the wires with
NOTE
electrical tape.
Most instruments are installed in the face of
the panel or through the rear of the panel. 2. Remove two mounting screws in the side of the
Screws through flanges or clamps with glareshield and release the 10 Dzus fasteners.
screws accessible on the panel face are
used to attach instruments.
3. Remove the six screws that hold the glareshield
to the front of the instrument panel.
For back-mounted instruments, get access
to the electrical cables and/or the piping. 4. Lift the glareshield from the instrument panel and
remove it from the helicopter. Keep the corners of the
If necessary, remove the ADI to get access glareshield away from the standby compasses.
to the standby attitude electrical leads.
Remove the nine screws around the 95-8. Glareshield — Installation
perimeter of the pilot and copilot instrument
panels to remove the panels.
CAUTION
1. Remove the protective caps from front or clamp
mounted instruments.
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER.
2. Connect the electrical connectors and/or the
instrument piping. 1. Put the glareshield in position.
2. Make sure that the front edge of the glareshield is

under the defog nozzles. Align the fastener holes with
CAUTION their mating holes on the instrument panel.
3. Put each fastener in position.

CLAMPS THAT ARE TOO TIGHT CAN
DAMAGE THE INSTRUMENT. 4. Make sure that the glareshield aligns with the
instrument panel, defog nozzles, and the windshield
3. Put the instrument in position and install or wiper motors. Tighten each fastener.
tighten the screws.
5. Connect electrical wires L421A22 to connector
8DS36P1 and wire L381A22N to connector 8DS36P2
95-6. GLARESHIELD (Chapter 98).
The glareshield contains the pilot (and copilot, if 95-9. INSTRUMENT PANEL
installed) master warning/caution panel, fire panel,
engine Full Authority Digital Electronic Control Pilot and copilot instrument panels (Figure 95-1 and
(FADEC) panel, engine start panel, engine out Figure 95-2) contain all of the flight, communication,
and RPM warning lights. navigation, integrated instrument display system, and
95-00-00
Page 10 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
miscellaneous instruments, except the standby 95-12. Copilot Instrument Panel — Removal
magnetic compasses.
95-10. Pilot Instrument Panel — Removal

CAUTION
CAUTION REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER.
1. Disconnect and remove the ADI and HSI or RMI,

REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER. if installed. (If EFIS equipment is installed, do not
remove the instrument clamp screws completely
1. Disconnect and remove the Attitude Direction (Chapter 97).)
Indicator (ADI) and Horizontal Situation Indicator
(HSI). (If EFIS equipment is installed, do not remove
the instrument clamp screws completely (Chapter 2. Loosen the nine screws around the perimeter of
97).) the copilot instrument panel.
2. Loosen the nine screws around the perimeter of 3. Disconnect all electrical connectors of equipment
the pilot instrument panel. mounted on the copilot instrument panel.
3. Disconnect all electrical connectors of equipment 4. Disconnect the quick release pitot-static
mounted on the pilot instrument panel. connections behind the copilot instrument panel.
4. Disconnect the quick release pitot-static

5. Carefully move the copilot instrument panel
connections behind the pilot instrument panel.
towards the rear and remove it from the helicopter.
5. Carefully move the pilot instrument panel towards

the rear and remove it from the helicopter. 95-13. Copilot Instrument Panel — Installation
95-11. Pilot Instrument Panel — Installation 1. Put the copilot instrument panel in position.
1. Put the pilot instrument panel in position. 2. Connect the quick release pitot-static connections
behind the copilot instrument panel.
2. Connect the quick release pitot-static connections
behind the pilot instrument panel. 3. Connect all electrical connectors of equipment
mounted on the copilot instrument panel. (Do not
3. Connect all electrical connectors of equipment install the ADI and HSI at this time.)
mounted on the pilot instrument panel. (Do not install
the ADI and HSI at this time.)
4. Carefully align the copilot instrument panel
screws with their mating holes on the instrument panel
4. Carefully align the pilot instrument panel screws mounting frame.
with their mating holes on the pilot instrument panel
mounting frame.
5. Secure the nine screws around the perimeter of
the copilot instrument panel.
5. Secure the nine screws around the perimeter of
pilot instrument panel.
6. Install and reconnect the ADI and HSI (if
6. Install and reconnect the ADI and HSI. installed).
7. Carry out a pitot-static sense and leak check of 7. Carry out a pitot-static sense and leak check of
the pilot pitot-static system (paragraph 95-23). the copilot pitot-static system (paragraph 95-24).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 11/12
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-1. Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (E/M and Kits)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 13
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-2. Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (EFIS and Kits)
95-00-00
Page 14 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM
95-14. PITOT STATIC SYSTEMS 95-17. COPILOT PITOT SYSTEM
The pilot and copilot pitot static systems are separate The copilot pitot system (Figure 95-3) consists of a left
and independent total pressure (impact air) and static electrically heated pitot tube that is pneumatically
air pressure (outside air pressure) sensing systems. connected to the copilot airspeed indicator.
Pitot tube and static ports are electrically heated to
operate in all weather conditions. The pitot consists of 95-18. PILOT STATIC SYSTEM
the pilot system and copilot system and an optional
auxiliary system pitot static switch with the retractable
The pilot static system (Figure 95-4) consists of
landing gear option (Figure 95-3).
interconnected right upper and left lower electrically
heated static ports. This system is designed to provide
The static system consists of four electrically heated static pressure to the pilot altimeter, vertical speed
static ports divided into pilot and copilot static system, indicator, airspeed indicator, and an optional air data
an alternative static air pressure switch, and an computer. If an air data computer is installed, the
optional auxiliary static switch system (Figure 95-4).
altimeter/vertical speed indicator is not connected to
the pitot static system.
95-15. PILOT PITOT SYSTEM
95-19. COPILOT STATIC SYSTEM
The pilot pitot system (Figure 95-3) consists of a right
electrically heated pitot tube that is pneumatically
The copilot static system (Figure 95-4) consists of
connected to the pilot airspeed indicator, to an optional
interconnected left upper and right lower electrically
air data computer, and to an auxiliary pitot switch
heated static ports. This system is designed to provide
system (with the retractable landing gear option).
static pressure to the copilot altimeter, vertical speed
and airspeed indicators, and auxiliary static switch
95-16. AUXILIARY SYSTEM PITOT STATIC
system. Static pressure from the copilot static system
SWITCH
can go to the pilot flight instrument if the alternative
static air switch is set to ALTN.
The auxiliary system pitot static switch is applicable to
the retractable landing gear option. The auxiliary
95-20. ALTERNATIVE STATIC AIR SOURCE
system pitot static switch allows the copilot pitot static
SWITCH
system to be isolated from the landing gear airspeed
switch if the airspeed switch fails. The auxiliary system
pitot static switch (Figure 95-4) is installed on the The alternate static source switch provides an
center pedestal and has appropriate tubing and alternate static source to the pilot instruments in the
hardware for interconnection of system components. event of a failure of pilot primary static source.
In NORM, copilot pitot static air pressure is distributed
to the landing gear warning horn pressure switch. In In the normal condition, the alternative static air source
OFF, the landing gear warning horn pressure switch is switch assembly (Figure 95-4) is set to PRI. In that
pneumatically disconnected from the copilot pitot static position, static air pressure from right upper and left
system. lower ports (pilot static system) goes to the pilot flight
instrument system. If a failure occurs in the primary
The switches are covered by guards in the NORM pilot static system, you can set the switch to ALTN to
position and have to be moved together to disconnect provide copilot static air pressure (right lower and left
the copilot pitot static system. upper static ports) to the pilot flight instrument.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 15
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-3. Pitot System
95-00-00
Page 16 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-4. Static System
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 17
BHT-430-MM-10
95-21. PITOT STATIC SYSTEM — VISUAL 95-23. PILOT PITOT STATIC SYSTEM — LEAK
INSPECTION TEST
1. Examine each pitot tube and static port for a

clogged or obstructed inlet opening. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
2. Examine each pitot tube for clogged drain hole on NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
the bottom of the tube.
1811G Pitot Static Tester,
3. Examine the static vents for corrosion and pits. Barfield Instrument
Corp. or Equivalent
4. Examine the pitot tubes for corrosion and/or 18821-4 Pitot Tube Adapter Nav
damage (flaking or burning). Aids Ltd.
33410S-70-4 Universal Test Adapter,

5. For helicopters with retractable landing gear, Nav. Aids Ltd.
examine the landing gear warning horn switch for
proper attachment and tight connections.
NOTE
6. Examine the pitot static lines and flexible hoses
Make sure that the altimeter (or air data
for leaks and chafing.
system if installed) calibration date is within
the last 24 months.
95-22. PITOT STATIC SYSTEM — DRAINING
1. Write down the serial number, calibration date,
and maximum altitude to which the altimeter(s) was/
NOTE were calibrated.
Torque all plastic fittings to 15 ±5
inch-pounds (1.69 ±0.57 Nm). Care should
NOTE
be taken to ensure plastic fittings are not
overtorqued. During the tests that follow, you can use
adapters to connect the test set hoses to
1. Remove the caps from the drain points on both the pilot and copilot pitot tubes and static
pitot and static lines. ports at the same time.
2. Connect the applicable test set hoses of the pitot

2. Disconnect the pitot and static lines from all static test set to the right pitot tube and the right upper
instruments and switches. static port. You can use the universal test adapter
(33410S-70-4) to connect the test set hose to the
3. Seal all instruments and switches with caps. static port. You can use the pitot tube adapter
(18821-4) to connect the test set hose to the pitot
tube.
4. Use dry, filtered compressed air to clean the pitot
and static lines.
3. Seal all the drain holes and the left lower static
port.
5. Remove caps from the instruments and switches.
4. Examine all of the connections for tightness.
6. Connect the pitot and static lines.
5. Set the pilot alternative static source selector
7. Carry out a leak test (paragraph 95-23 or switch to PRI and, if installed, set the auxiliary system
paragraph 95-24). pitot static source selector switches to NORM.
95-00-00
Page 18 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
13. Leave the pressure source valve open until the

airspeed indicator on the test set shows 130 knots,
CAUTION
then close the pressure source valve.
DURING THE TEST, NEVER OPEN A 14. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set airspeed
LINE OR REMOVE A FITTING TO VENT indicators. Make sure that the helicopter airspeed
THE SYSTEM AS THIS CAN DAMAGE indicator shows 130 ±4 knots.
THE IN ST R UM E NTS. FOL LOW THE
TEST EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S 15. Make sure that the airspeed indicator on the
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF helicopter shows a minimum of 120 ±4 knots after 5
T E S T S E T VA LV E S . D O N O T minutes.
OVERTIGHTEN.
16. Open the pressure vent valve slowly to decrease
6. Open both vent valves on the tester to equalize
airspeed to zero.
the pressure in the lines.
17. Close the pressure vent valve.

7. Fully close all five valves on the test set and
make sure that each is completely closed.
NOTE
8. Adjust the barometric pressure dials on the
You can adjust the vacuum tank as required
helicopter and test set altimeters to 29.92 inches Hg
for the test.
(1013 millibars).
18. Pressurize the vacuum tank on the test set until
approximately 20 inches of Hg (67.4 kPa) or 6 PSI
NOTE
(67.4 kPa) shows on the vacuum gauge.
Pressurize the tank as required for the test.
9. Pressurize the pressure tank on the test set until

approximately 30.62 inches shows on the pressure CAUTION
gauge.
THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET ARE

SENSITIVE AND YOU SHOULD
CAUTION O P E R AT E T H E M S L O W LY A N D
C A R E F U L LY TO AV O I D P O S S I B L E
DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENTS.
THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET ARE INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF
SENSITIVE AND YOU SHOULD THE VALVES ON T HE TESTER CAN
O P E R AT E T H E M S L O W LY A N D DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND THE
C A R E F U L LY TO AV O I D P O S S I B L E INSTRUMENTS.
INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF 19. Slowly open the vacuum source valve on the test
THE VALVES ON T HE TESTER CAN set.
DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND THE
INSTRUMENTS. 20. Make sure that the altimeter and airspeed
indicator readings increase and that the VSI shows a
10. On the test set, open the pressure vent valve by positive rate of climb.
approximately 1/4 turn.
21. Slowly adjust the cross-bleed valve to put the

11. Slowly open the pressure source valve. altitude to 1500 feet (457 m) above the helicopter
elevation and to hold the helicopter airspeed
12. Close the pressure vent valve. indicator(s) at 100 knots.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 19
BHT-430-MM-10
22. Close both the cross-bleed valve and vacuum THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET CAN
source valve. DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND THE
INSTRUMENTS.
23. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set altimeters
and make sure that: 31. On the test set, open the pressure vent valve by
a. The loss in indicated altitude is not more than
100 feet (30 m) after 1 minute. 32. Slowly open the pressure source valve.
b. The vertical speed indicator indication, if not 33. Close the pressure vent valve.
zero, is negative and is not more than 100 fpm.
34. Leave the pressure valve open until the airspeed
indicator on the test set shows 130 knots, then close
the pressure source valve.
35. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set airspeed

24. Slowly open the vacuum vent valve on the test indicators. Make sure that the helicopter airspeed
set to decrease the vacuum. indicator shows 130 ±4 knots.
25. Make sure that the vertical speed indicator 36. Make sure that the airspeed indicator on the
indicates a negative rate of climb and that the helicopter shows a minimum of 120 ±4 knots after 5
helicopter altimeter, airspeed indicator, and test set minutes.
instruments return to ground level values.
26. Disconnect the static adaptor from the right upper airspeed to zero.
static port and connect it to right lower static port.

27. Seal the left upper static port.
28. Close all five valves on the test set. NOTE

Pressurize the vacuum tank as required for
29. Set the pilot alternative static source selector on the test.
the pedestal to ALTN.
approximately 19.96 inches Hg shows on the vacuum
NOTE gauge.

approximately 30.62 inches Hg shows on the pressure CAUTION
gauge.

SENSITIVE. OPERATE THEM SLOWLY
CAUTION AND CAREFULLY TO AVOID POSSIBLE
INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF
THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET ARE THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET CAN
SENSITIVE. OPERATE THEM SLOWLY DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND THE
AND CAREFULLY TO AVOID POSSIBLE INSTRUMENTS.
INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
42. Slowly open the vacuum source valve on the test 51. Remove all seals from the drain holes and static
set. ports.
43. Make sure that the altimeter and airspeed 52. Close all five valves on the test set and remove
indicator readings increase and that the VSI shows a the test set from the helicopter.
positive rate of climb.
95-24. COPILOT PITOT STATIC SYSTEM — LEAK
44. Slowly adjust the cross-bleed valve to put the TEST
altitude to 1500 feet (457 m) above the helicopter
elevation and to hold the helicopter airspeed indicator
at 100 knots.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
45. Close both the cross-bleed valve and vacuum

source valve. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1811G Pitot Static Tester,

46. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set altimeters Barfield Instrument
and make sure that: Corp. or Equivalent
a. The loss in indicated altitude is not more than 18821-4 Pitot Tube Adapter Nav
100 feet (30 m) after 1 minute. Aids Ltd.

b. The vertical speed indicator indication, if not Nav. Aids Ltd.
NOTE
CAUTION Make sure that the altimeter’s (or air data
system, if installed) calibration date is
within the last 24 months.
DURING THE TEST, NEVER OPEN A
LINE OR REMOVE A FITTING TO VENT 1. Write down the serial number, calibration date,
THE SYSTEM AS THIS CAN DAMAGE and the maximum altitude to which the altimeter(s)
THE IN ST R UM E NTS. FOL LOW THE was/were calibrated.
TEST EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF
T E S T S E T VA LV E S . D O N O T NOTE
OVERTIGHTEN.
During the tests that follow, you can use
47. Slowly open the vacuum vent valve on the test adapters to connect the test set hoses to
set to decrease the vacuum. the pilot and copilot pitot tubes and static
ports at the same time.
48. Make sure that the vertical speed indicator 2. Connect the applicable test set hoses of the pitot
indicates a negative rate of climb and that the static test set to the left pitot tube and the left upper
helicopter altimeter, airspeed indicator, and test set static port. You can use the universal test adapter
instruments return to ground level values. (33410S-70-4) to connect the test set hose to the
static port. You can use the pitot tube adapter
49. Disconnect the static adaptor from the right lower (18821-4) to connect the test set hose to the pitot
static port and the pitot adaptor from the left pitot tube. tube.
50. Set the pilot alternative static source selector on 3. Seal all the drain holes and the right lower static
the pedestal to PRI. port with caps.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 21
BHT-430-MM-10
4. Examine all of the connections for tightness. 11. Close the pressure vent valve.
12. Leave the pressure source valve open until the

airspeed indicator on the test set shows 130 knots,
CAUTION then close the pressure source valve.
DURING THE TEST SET, NEVER OPEN A 13. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set airspeed
LINE OR REMOVE A FITTING FROM THE indicators. Make sure that the helicopter airspeed
VENT SYSTEM. THIS CAN DAMAGE THE indicator shows 130 ±4 knots.
INSTRUMENTS. FOLLOW THE TEST
E Q U I P M E N T M A N U FA C T U R E R ' S 14. Make sure that the airspeed indicator on the
INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF helicopter shows a minimum of 120 ±4 knots after 1
T H E T E S T S E T VA LV E S . D O N O T minute.
OVERTIGHTEN.
5. Open both vent valves on the test set to equalize airspeed to zero.
the pressure in the lines.
6. Fully close all five valves on the test set and
make sure that each is completely closed.
NOTE
7. Adjust the barometric pressure dials on the You can adjust the vacuum tank as required
helicopter and test set altimeters to 29.92 inches of Hg for the test.
(1013 millibars).
approximately 19.96 inches Hg shows on the vacuum
NOTE gauge.

approximately 30.62 inches of Hg shows on the CAUTION
pressure gauge.
SENSITIVE AND YOU SHOULD
CAUTION O P E R AT E T H E M S L O W LY A N D
C A R E F U L LY TO AV O I D P O S S I B L E
THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET ARE INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF
SENSITIVE AND YOU SHOULD THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET CAN
O P E R AT E T H E M S L O W LY A N D DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND
C A R E F U L LY TO AV O I D P O S S I B L E INSTRUMENTS.
INCORRECT OR FAST ADJUSTMENT OF 18. Slowly open the vacuum source valve on the test
THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET CAN set.
DAMAGE THE TEST SET AND
INSTRUMENTS. 19. Make sure that the altimeter and airspeed
indicator(s) readings increase and that VSI shows a
9. On the test set, open the pressure vent valve by positive rate of climb.
20. Slowly adjust the cross-bleed valve to put the
10. Slowly open the pressure source valve. altitude to 1500 feet (457 m) above the helicopter
95-00-00
Page 22 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
elevation and to hold the helicopter airspeed 31. Close all five valves on the test set and remove
indicator(s) at 100 knots. the test set from helicopter.
21. Close both the cross-bleed valve and vacuum 95-25. PITOT STATIC HEATER
source valves.
The pitot tubes and the four static ports are electrically
22. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set altimeters heated to prevent the formation of ice on the surfaces.
and make sure that: The heaters are controlled by a PLT PITOT STATIC
HTR switch (10S1) and a CPLT PITOT STATIC HTR
a. The loss in indicated altitude is not more than switch (10S4) located on the overhead panel. 28 VDC
100 feet (30 m) after 1 minute. power to the pilot pitot and static heater system is
supplied from the EMERG BUS 2 and the copilot static
b. The vertical speed indicator indication, if not heater system is supplied from the EMERG BUS 1.
95-26. Pitot Static Heater — Operational Check
23. Set the pilot static pressure system selector
switch on the pedestal to ALTN.
Troubleshooting charts for the pitot static heater are on
Figure 95-5.
24. Make sure that the altimeter pointer stays at the
same altitude indication.
25. Return the pilot static pressure system selector WARNING

switch to PRI.
D O N O T T O U C H T H E H E AT E D
SURFACES. TO PREVENT BURNS, PUT
CAUTION YOUR HANDS NEAR THE SURFACE TO
DO A CHECK OF HEATER OPERATION.
NEVER BREAK A LINE OR REMOVE A

FITTING TO VENT THE SYSTEM. NOTE
S L O W LY O P E R ATE T H E T E S T S E T Use external power during ground
VA LV E S . I N C O R R E C T O R FA S T maintenance procedures to prevent battery
ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVES ON THE depletion.
TEST SET CAN DAMAGE THE
INSTRUMENTS.
1. Remove the pilot pitot tube cover.
26. Slowly open the vacuum vent valve on the tester
momentarily to decrease the vacuum. 2. Open the PITOT STATIC COPLT circuit breaker.
27. Make sure that the vertical speed indicator(s) 3. Set the PLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch to on.
shows a negative rate of climb.
RESULT:
28. Slowly open the vacuum vent valve on the test
set. Monitor the test set and helicopter altimeters and
make sure that they go to ground level values. • The pilot pitot tube begins to heat.
29. Disconnect the static adaptor from the right lower • The right upper and left lower side static ports
static port and the pitot adaptor from the left pitot tube. begin to heat.
30. Remove all seals from the drains holes and static • The PLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch light goes
ports. green.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 23
BHT-430-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION: • The right lower and left upper static ports
begin to heat.
• If the right pilot pitot tube does not heat, refer
to Trouble No. 1, Figure 95-5. • The COPLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch lights
go to green.
• If the pilot right upper static port does not heat,
refer to Trouble No. 2, Figure 95-5.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the pilot left lower static port does not heat,
refer to Trouble No. 3, Figure 95-5. • If the copilot left pitot tube does not begin to
heat, refer to Trouble No. 4, Figure 95-5.
• If the PLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch does
not go to green, refer to the overhead switch • If the copilot left upper static port does not
lights. begin to heat, refer to Trouble No. 5,
Figure 95-5.
4. Set the PLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch to OFF.
• If the right lower static port does not begin to
RESULT: heat, refer to Trouble No. 6, Figure 95-5.
• The pitot tube, right upper, and left lower static

• If the COPLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch
ports begin to cool.
lights do not go green, refer to overhead panel
switch lights.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the pitot tube, right upper, and the left lower 10. Set the COPLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch to
static ports do not cool, replace the PLT OFF.
PITOT STATIC HTR switch (10S1).
RESULT:
CAUTION • The copilot pitot tube, right lower, and left

upper static ports begin to cool.
LET T HE PILOT PITO T TUBE COO L

BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE COVER. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
5. Install the cover on the pilot pitot tube • If the copilot pitot tube, right lower, and left
upper static ports do not begin to cool, replace
6. Remove the copilot pitot tube cover. the copilot pitot heater switch (10S4).
7. Open the PITOT STATIC PLT circuit breaker. 11. Close the PITOT STATIC PLT circuit breaker.
8. Close the PITOT STATIC COPLT circuit breaker.
CAUTION
9. Set the COPLT PITOT STATIC HTR switch to
ON.
LET THE COPILOT PITOT TUBE COOL
RESULT: BEFORE YOU REPLACE THE COVER.
• The copilot pitot tube begins to heat. 12. Replace the cover on the copilot pitot tube.
95-00-00
Page 24 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-5. Pitot Static Heater System — Troubleshooting Charts (Sheet 1 of 6)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 25
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 26 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 27/28
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 29
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 30 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 31
BHT-430-MM-10
95-27. PITOT TUBE 95-30. LANDING GEAR WARNING HORN

PRESSURE SWITCH
95-28. Pitot Tube — Removal
The landing gear warning horn pressure switch is
applicable to the retractable landing gear option. The
landing gear warning horn (Figure 95-4 and
CAUTION Figure 95-6) pressure switch is a dual port switch that
is actuated by differential pressure that exists between
the pitot and static system. If no differential pressure
MAKE SURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL exists, the switch contact is closed. The switch
POWER IS REMOVED BEFORE YOU DO contacts open at an airspeed of 51 to 58 knots
THE PROCEDURE THAT FOLLOWS. increasing and close at 58 to 39 knots decreasing. The
pitot and static ports of the switch are attached to the
1. Disconnect the electrical connector and apply auxiliary system pitot static lines, respectively.
tape or seal the connector with a cap to prevent the
entrance of unwanted material. 95-31. Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure
Switch — Removal
2. Disconnect the pitot line from the pitot tube.
3. Seal the open pitot line with a cap. CAUTION
4. Remove the attaching screws and carefully

remove the pitot tube. MAKE SURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL
POWER IS REMOVED BEFORE YOU DO
THE PROCEDURE THAT FOLLOWS.
95-29. Pitot Tube — Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical power. Seal the
connector with a cap to prevent contamination.
NOTE
Torque all plastic fittings to 15 ±5 2. Disconnect the pitot static lines from the landing
inch-pounds (1.69 ±0.57 Nm). Care should gear warning horn pressure switch. Seal all open ports
be taken to ensure plastic fittings are not and lines with a cap.
overtorqued.
1. Remove the cap from the pitot line and connect 3. Remove the attaching screws and nuts.
the line to the pitot tube.
4. Remove the landing gear warning horn pressure
switch from the helicopter.
2. Remove the tape from the electrical connector.
95-32. Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure

3. Connect the electrical connector.
Switch — Installation
4. Carefully put the pitot tube into position.

NOTE
5. Install the pitot tube attaching screws. Torque all plastic fittings to 15 ±5
inch-pounds (1.69 ±0.57 Nm). Care should
be taken to ensure plastic fittings are not
6. Do an operational check of the pitot heaters overtorqued.
(paragraph 95-25).
1. Install the landing gear warning horn pressure
7. Do a pitot static leak test (paragraph 95-23 or switch on the mount with the screws and nuts. Torque
paragraph 95-24). nuts 20-25 inch-pounds (2.26-2.82 Nm).
95-00-00
Page 32 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-6. Landing Gear Warning Horn Location Drawing
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 33
BHT-430-MM-10
2. Remove caps from the switch ports and the pitot 4. Make sure that the AUX SYS PITOT STATIC
static lines. switches are in NORM.
3. Connect the pitot static lines to the proper ports 5. Slowly increase pitot pressure until the landing
on the landing gear warning horn pressure switch. gear warning horn pressure switch contacts open.
4. Do a pitot static leak test (paragraph 95-23 and RESULT:

paragraph 95-24).
• The landing gear warning horn pressure
5. Do the landing gear warning horn system switch contacts open when the test set
operational check (paragraph 95-33). airspeed is between 51 and 58 knots.
95-33. Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure CORRECTIVE ACTION:

Switch — Operational Check
• If the landing gear warning horn pressure
switch contacts are still closed when the test
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED set airspeed indicator is between 51 and 58
knots, refer to Trouble No. 1, Figure 95-7.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 6. Increase the test set pressure until an airspeed of

100 knots is reached.
Multimeter
1811G Pitot Static Tester, 7. Slowly decrease the pressure.

Barfield Instrument
Corp. or Equivalent RESULT:
18821-4 Pitot Tube Adapter Nav • The landing gear warning horn pressure
Aids Ltd. switch contacts close when the airspeed
indication is between 58 and 39 knots.
Nav. Aids Ltd. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Troubleshooting charts for the landing gear warning • If the landing gear warning horn pressure
horn low pressure switch are on Figure 95-7. switch contacts do not close when the
airspeed indication is between 58 and 39
knots, replace the airspeed switch.
CAUTION
8. Slowly increase the test set airspeed to 100
knots.
REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER
BEFORE YOU DO THE PROCEDURE RESULT:
THAT FOLLOWS.
• Make sure that the landing gear warning horn
1. Disconnect the electrical connector (24S19P1) pressure switch contacts open.
from the landing gear warning horn pressure switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
2. Connect a multimeter between pins B and C of
connector (24S19J1). The resistance should be less • If the landing gear warning horn pressure
than 5 ohms. (Leave the multimeter connected.) contacts are not open, replace the airspeed
switch.
3. Connect the pitot static test set as described in
paragraph 95-24. 9. Set the auxiliary pitot static switches to OFF.
95-00-00
Page 34 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-7. Landing Gear Warning Horn Pressure Switch — Troubleshooting Chart
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 35
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: 13. Remove the multimeter leads from the landing

gear warning horn pressure switch.
• The landing gear warning horn pressure
switch contacts are closed.
14. Connect electrical connector (24S19P1) to the
CORRECTIVE ACTION: switch receptacle.
• If the landing gear warning horn switch 95-34. AIR DATA COMPUTER
contacts are not closed when the auxiliary
pitot static switches are OFF, replace the
auxiliary pitot static switch. The air data computer (18A1) uses the pitot and static
pressures from the pilot pitot/static system and the
10. Return the test set pressures to ambient pressure outside air temperature from the temperature probe
and vent the test set. (18TS1). The processed data supplies the altitude/
vertical speed indicator with the altitude, vertical
11. Return the auxiliary pitot static switches to speed, density altitude, and altitude alerter
NORM. information. The air data computer also supplies the
true airspeed to the AFCS computer. The air data
12. Disconnect the test set from the pitot and static computer is on the lower left nose shelf. For more
ports (paragraph 95-24). information, refer to Chapter 22.
95-00-00
Page 36 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM
95-35. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS • Magnetic compass
The flight instrument installation consists of the IIDS, • Integrated instrument display system (IIDS)
pilot airspeed indicator, standby attitude indicator, flight displays
course deviation indicator, horizontal situation
indicator, attitude indicator, altimeter, vertical speed • Pilot (HSI)
indicator, and radar altimeter. When the copilot
instrument equipment kit is installed, the flight • Pilot standby attitude indicator
instruments also include the copilot airspeed indicator,
altimeter, and vertical speed indicator. With the • Copilot gyrocompass
Electronic Flight Instruments System (EFIS) installed,
there is no turn-and-slip indicator on the pilot side. • Copilot turn-and-slip indicator
95-36. BASIC HELICOPTER (ELECTRO- 95-38. SINGLE-PILOT IFR HELICOPTER

MECHANICAL INSTRUMENTS) (ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
SYSTEM)
The instruments included in this configuration are:
The instruments included in this configuration are:
• Airspeed indicator
• Combined altitude/vertical speed indicator
• Attitude indicator
• Airspeed indicator
• Barometric altimeter
• Integrated instrument display system (IIDS)
• Course deviation indicator (CDI) flight displays
• Integrated instrument display system (IIDS) • Magnetic compass

flight displays
• Pilot standby attitude indicator
• Magnetic compass
• Course deviation indicator (CDI)
• Pilot electronic attitude direction indicator
• Turn-and-slip indicator (EADI)
• Vertical speed indicator • Pilot electronic horizontal situation indicator

(EHSI)
95-37. DUAL-PILOT IFR HELICOPTER (ELECTRO-
MECHANICAL INSTRUMENTS) • Copilot altimeter
The instruments included in this configuration are: • Copilot VSI
• Pilot and copilot airspeed indicators, • Copilot ASI

barometric altimeters, and vertical-speed
indicators • Copilot ADI
• Pilot and copilot attitude indicators • Pilot and copilot airspeed indicators
• Pilot and copilot course deviation indicators • Pilot and copilot course deviation indicators
(CDI) (CDI)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 37
BHT-430-MM-10
95-39. DUAL-PILOT IFR HELICOPTER of the attitude indicator for the Electromechanical (E/
(ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT M) configuration or to the left of the EADI for the EFIS
SYSTEM) configuration.
The instruments included in this configuration are: 95-41. Airspeed Indicators — Operational Check
• Pilot and copilot electronic attitude direction The operational check of the airspeed indicator is
indicators (EADI) done as part of the pitot static leak test (paragraph
95-23 and paragraph 95-24).
• Pilot and copilot electronic horizontal situation
indicators (EHSI) 95-42. ALTIMETER INDICATORS
• Magnetic compass The altimeter indicators (Figure 95-9) are single-scale

indicators that give helicopter height in feet above sea
• Pilot combined altitude and vertical speed level (sea level when barometric pressure is set to
indicator (if FD is installed) 29.92 inches of Hg (100.95 kPa)). The indicators
sense atmospheric pressure through the static ports of
• Pilot barometric altimeter (when no FD is the pitot static system (refer to Figure 95-4). The
installed) altimeter indicator is calibrated to indicate from –1000
to 30,000 feet above sea level. An adjustment knob
• Pilot vertical speed indicator (when no FD is lets you set the altimeters to local airport barometric
installed) pressure.

Appropriate marks that denote altitude in increments
of 20 feet appear on the indicator.
• Copilot barometric altimeter
The pilot instrument lighting system provides lighting
• Copilot turn-and-slip indicator
input to the pilot altimeter.
• Copilot vertical speed indicator
The copilot instrument lighting system provides
lighting input to copilot altimeter.
95-40. AIRSPEED INDICATORS
The airspeed indicators (Figure 95-8) are single scale The pilot altimeter is located on the right side of the
indicators that indicate 0 to 180 knots. The indicator instrument panel to the right of the attitude indicator for
gets the instantaneous differential pressure from the the electromechanical instrument configuration or to
pitot (impact) total pressure and static port’s ambient the right of the EADI for the EFIS configuration.
pressure. The instruments are calibrated to read
forward airspeed in knots. The copilot altimeter is located on the left side of the
instrument panel to the right side of the attitude
The indicator includes a dial that denotes the airspeed indicator for the electromechanical instrument
continuous operation range, maximum limitation for configuration or to the right of the EADI for the EFIS
autorotation, maximum airspeed limitation, and configuration.
unreliable airspeed indication range.
If the AFCS with the Flight Director option is installed,
The pilot instrument lighting system provides the the pilot pneumatic altimeter is replaced by a
lighting to the pilot airspeed indicator. combined Altitude and Vertical Speed Indicator (ALT/
VSI) instrument.
The copilot instrument lighting system provides the
lighting to the copilot airspeed indicator. 95-43. Altimeter Indicators — Operational Check
The pilot and copilot airspeed indicators are located on The operational check of the altimeter indicator is
the right and left sides of the instrument panel, done as part of the pitot static test (paragraph 95-23
respectively. These instruments are located to the left and paragraph 95-24).
95-00-00
Page 38 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-8. Airspeed Indicator
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 39
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-9. Altimeter
95-00-00
Page 40 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-44. ENCODING ALTIMETER • 100-foot altitude indicator needle (2) —

This needle shows the altitude in 100-foot
The encoding altimeter replaces the pilot barometric major increments and 20-foot minor
altimeter when the transponder kit is installed. The increments with a resolution to the nearest 1
encoding altimeter (Figure 95-10) gives direct foot.
indication of the helicopter height above a reference
point, which is usually sea level. Atmospheric pressure
is sensed through the static ports of the pitot static • Digital altitude display (3) — This display
systems. The encoding altimeter is calibrated to shows the present altitude up to 55,000 feet in
indicate from –1000 to 35,000 feet above sea level. An 20-foot increments when the vertical speed is
adjustment knob lets you set an altimeter to local below 1000 fpm and in 100-foot increments
barometric pressure. The internal encoder provides when the vertical speed is above 1000 fpm.
altitude signals to the transponder in accordance with When the altitude is invalid, a FAIL message
ICAO altitude code requirements. Knob rotations is shown on this display along with the ALT
associated with usual altimeter operation do not affect flag.
the code output.
• Altitude alert (ALERT) display (4) — The

95-45. Encoding Altimeter — Operational Check
ALERT display comes on 1000 feet before the
selected altitude, goes off 300 feet before the
The operational check of the encoding altimeter is
selected altitude and comes on momentarily
done as part of the pitot static system (paragraph
95-23). when the selected altitude is reached. After
the selected altitude is reached, the display
comes on to indicate that the altitude is
95-46. Encoding Altimeter — Troubleshooting
beyond the 300 foot “safe band”. The display
will stay on until 1000 feet from the selected
Do the steps as necessary to isolate trouble.
altitude. You will hear a second sound anytime
the ALERT display comes on after the
95-47. ALTITUDE AND VERTICAL SPEED
selected altitude is reached.
INDICATOR
A combined altitude and vertical speed indicator • Altitude select/density altitude display (5)
(Figure 95-11) replaces the pilot's altimeter and — This display shows selected altitude for the
vertical speed instruments when the AFCS with Flight altitude alert function. You can change the
Director option is installed. display by the altitude select knob in 100-foot
increments. The density altitude is shown for 5
The ALT/VSI (KAV 485) is part of the AFCS Flight seconds at the end of the Push-To-Test
Director Kit. The altitude/vertical speed indicator sequence. (You can get the 5-second display
displays altitude and vertical speed information for the anytime. Push the PUSH BARO TEST button
pilot. Air Data Computer (ADC) KDC 481T supplies the two times. The first push starts the test
altitude and vertical speed information to the altitude/ sequence and the second push stops the test
vertical speed indicator.
sequence).
95-48. Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator (ALT/VSI)

• Density altitude (DEN) display (6) — The
The altitude/vertical speed indicator ALT/VSI (18DS1) DEN display comes on anytime the related
is on the right side of the pilot instrument panel altitude display is density altitude. The density
(Figure 95-11). The altitude/vertical speed indicator altitude display comes on for 5 seconds at the
gives input signals to the flight director. The end of the Push-To-Test sequence. (You can
description of the ALT/VSI panel is as follows: get the 5-second display anytime. Push the
PUSH BARO TEST button two times. The first
• Photocell (1) — The photocell dims the digital push starts the test sequence and the second
readout displays automatically. push stops the test sequence).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 41
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-10. Encoding Altimeter
95-00-00
Page 42 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-11. Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 43
BHT-430-MM-10
• Vertical speed/altitude select knob (7) — • Vertical speed (VS) flag (12) — The vertical
This knob is a dual concentric knob. The inner speed flag is shown when the vertical speed
knob has an in (altitude select) and an out information is invalid.
(vertical speed) position. When the knob is in
the out position (vertical speed), you will see a • Vertical speed indicator needle (13) — This
bright orange band around the knob. With the needle shows instantaneous vertical speed.
knob in the in position (altitude select
position), turning the inner knob will cause the • Altimeter setting display (14) — The
altitude select display to change in 100-foot altimeter setting display shows the altimeter
increments with roll over into the 1000 digits. setting in inches of mercury (IN HG) or in
When the outer knob is rotated, the altitude hectopascals (HPa). The range of settings is
select display will change in 1000-foot from 22.00 to 32.00 IN HG or from 745 to
increments with roll over in the 10,000 digits. 1084 HPa.
• Remote altitude select (ALT SEL) flight • Altimeter (ALT) flag (15) — The altimeter
director mode selector button (8) — flag is shown when the altitude information is
Pressing the ALT SEL push button will arm the invalid.
altitude select capture mode of the KFC 500
flight control system. Pressing the push button • Inches of mercury/hectopascal select
when altitude select mode is armed will cancel pushbutton (16) — This pushbutton selects
the altitude select arm mode. inches of mercury (IN HG) or hectopascals
(HPa) for the altimeter setting display.
• Remote vertical speed (VS ENG) flight
95-49. Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator —
director mode selector button (9) —
Removal
Pressing the VS ENG push button will engage
the VS mode of the KFC 500 flight control
1. Loosen the four face plate screws two turns each.
system. Pressing the VS ENG push button
Do not remove the screws.
when the VS mode is engaged will cancel the
VS mode.
2. Slide the altitude/vertical speed indicator out of
the instrument panel.
• Altimeter (BARO) setting knob/
Push-To-Test (PUSH TEST) button (10) —
3. Remove the connector from the rear of the
This knob is a dual concentric knob. The inner
altitude/vertical speed indicator.
knob adjusts the single hectopascal or
hundredths of inches of mercury portion of the
baro correction window with automatic rollover 95-50. Altitude/Vertical Speed Indicator —
to higher digits. The outer knob adjusts the Installation
setting in tens of hectopascal or tenths of
inches of mercury. It also features rollover to 1. Connect the electrical connector to the rear of the
higher digits. The PUSH TEST button at the unit.
center of the inner knob starts the system self
test procedure. Pushing the PUSH TEST 2. Install the altitude/vertical speed indicator in the
button again will stop the test procedure. instrument panel.
• Vertical speed bug (11) — Refer to the 3. Tighten the four face plate screws.
vertical speed bug shown for the vertical
speed as selected. (The vertical speed bug is 95-51. ALT/VSI Power-Up Test
normally behind the shroud at the three
o'clock position on the VS display). The
NOTE
vertical speed bug is seen when the inner
concentric vertical speed select knob is pulled Use external power during ground
out or when the VS flight director mode is maintenance procedures to prevent battery
engaged. depletion.
95-00-00
Page 44 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
1. Apply electrical power to the system. • The ALT/VSI system starts to climb from
26,800 to 28,000 feet at 3,500 feet per minute.
2. Open the PILOT ALT/VSI circuit breaker
(CBE15). • At 27,000 feet, a steady ALERT display
comes on and you hear the alert sound.
3. Close the PILOT ALT/VSI circuit breaker.
• At 27,700 feet, the ALERT display goes off.
RESULT:
• At 28,000 feet, The ALERT display flashes
briefly and goes off.
• The ALT/VSI shows the selected altitude and
barometric correction that was selected before
• The ALT/VSI system pauses at 28,000 feet for
the electrical power was removed.
3 seconds.
• The ALT and VS flags go out of view.

• The ALT/VSI system starts to descend at
3,500 feet per minute as the VS bug follows
• The barometric corrected altitude of the the VS pointer.
helicopter is shown.
• At 27,700 feet, a steady ALERT display
• If the ALT/VSI receives invalid altitude data, comes on and you hear the alert sound.
the ALT flag comes into view and FAIL is
shown in the altitude display window. • At 27,000 feet, all of the flags come into view
and FAIL is shown in the digital altitude
• If the ALT/VSI receives invalid vertical speed display window.
data, the VS bug will not be seen and the VS
flag comes into view. • All of the display segments come on except
the altitude select window. The altitude select
• If the ALT/VSI does not receive any ARINC window shows the helicopter density altitude.
429 data, the altitude select display and
barometric corrected display will flash and the • The ALT/VSI system returns to normal
VS flag and ALT flag come into view. operation.
4. Remove the electrical power from the system. 3. Remove electrical power from the system.
95-52. ALT/VSI Self-Test (Below 50 Knots) 95-53. ALT/VSI Self-Test (Above 50 Knots)
1. Apply electrical power to the system. 1. Push the PUSH TEST button on the ALT/VSI.
2. Push the PUSH TEST button on the ALT/VSI. RESULT:
RESULT: • All the display segments come on.
• All of the display segments appear for 3 • All the flags come into view.
seconds.
95-54. PILOT AND COPILOT VERTICAL SPEED
• All of the flags come into view. INDICATORS
• The Altitude Select Display is set at 28,000 The vertical speed indicators (Figure 95-12) register
feet. the ascent and descent speed of the helicopter from 0
to 3500 feet per minute. The vertical speed indicators
• The displayed helicopter altitude is set at are connected to the static air systems and sense the
26,800 feet. instantaneous rate of change of atmospheric pressure.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 45
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-12. Vertical Speed Indicator
95-00-00
Page 46 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
The indicator dial incorporates marks that indicate the 95-58. Pilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator (if installed)
rate of ascent or descent in feet per minute.
The pilot turn-and-slip indicator operates from the 28
Pilot instrument and copilot instrument lighting VDC essential bus 2 through the TURN SLIP PLT
systems provide lighting to the respective pilot and circuit breaker (CB-C14). The indicator is located on
copilot vertical speed indicators. the right side of the instrument panel to the left of the
horizontal situation indicator for the
Electro-Mechanical instrument configuration. The pilot
If the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) with the
turn-and-slip indicator is not installed if the pilot EFIS
option of the flight director is installed, the pilot vertical
is installed.
speed indicator is replaced by a combined ALT/VSI
indicator.
The pilot instrument lighting system provides 5 volt
lighting power to the pilot turn-and-slip indicator.
95-55. Pilot and Copilot Vertical Speed Indicators
— Operational Check 95-59. Copilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator
The operational check of the vertical speed indicator is The copilot turn-and-slip indicator operates from the
done as part of the pitot static leak test (paragraph 28 VDC essential bus 1 through the TURN SLIP
95-23 or paragraph 95-24). COPLT circuit breaker (CB-C5).
95-56. Pilot and Copilot Vertical Speed Indicators The copilot instrument lighting system provides 5 volt
— Troubleshooting lighting power to the copilot turn-and-slip indicator.
Indication of trouble: 95-60. Turn-and-Slip Indicator — Operational

Check
1. If the pointer is off zero, turn the adjustment Troubleshooting charts for the turn-and-slip indicator
screw on the face of the instrument to return the are in Figure 95-14.
pointer to zero. Tap the indicator bezel lightly while you
adjust it.
NOTE
2. If the indicator shows inaccurate readings, carry Use external power during ground
out the pitot static leak test. If no leak is found, replace maintenance procedures to prevent battery
the indicators. depletion.
1. Connect the external power.

3. If the indicator pointer oscillates, carry out the
pitot static leak test. If no leak is found, replace the
indicators. RESULT:
• The power OFF warning flag is out of view

95-57. PILOT AND COPILOT TURN-AND-SLIP within approximately 3 minutes.
INDICATOR
• The pointer is in the center of the display.
The turn-and-slip indicator (Figure 95-13) consists of a
rate-of-turn pointer and an inclinometer (ball) that • The pointer is steady.
operate independently of each other. A rate gyro
operates on 28 VDC and is self-contained in the • The ball is in the center of the display.
indicator. The gyro controls the rate-of-turn indicator,
which indicates direction and rate-of-turn. The CORRECTIVE ACTION:
inclinometer (ball) indicates when the helicopter is in
directional balance, either in a turn or straight and • If the power OFF warning flag is not out of
level flight. The power warning flag moves to indicate view within approximately 3 minutes, refer to
OFF when the electrical power is no longer supplied to Trouble No. 1 and Trouble No. 2,
the indicator. Figure 95-14.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 47
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-13. Turn-and-Slip Indicator
95-00-00
Page 48 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-14. Pilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 49
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-14. Pilot Turn-and-Slip Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 50 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
• If the pointer is not in the center of the display, CORRECTIVE ACTION:

replace the turn-and-slip indicator.
• If the ATT flag does not disappear within the 2
• If the pointer is not steady, replace the minutes, refer to Trouble No. 1, Figure 95-15.
turn-and-slip indicator.
2. Check that the display indicates properly and
remains stable in both pitch and roll. If not, replace the
• If the ball is not in the center of the display,
indicator.
replace the turn-and-slip indicator.
3. Turn the pitch trim knob (at the lower center of the
95-61. ATTITUDE INDICATOR (ELECTRO- indicator).
MECHANICAL)
RESULT:
The indicator operates on 28 VDC. The attitude
indicator (Figure 95-15) is a self-contained, 4 inch • The trim indicator moves up or down.
(10.16 cm) instrument mounted in the instrument
panel directly in front of the pilot and/or copilot. The CORRECTIVE ACTION:
attitude indicator includes a vertical gyroscope
mounted within pitch and roll gimbals. A mechanically • If the trim indicator moves neither up nor down
driven spheroid registers displacement of the by rotation of the pitch trim knob, check if the
helicopter in the pitch and roll axes with respect to a knob is properly secured. If the knob is
miniature aircraft symbol. The fixed roll index pointer properly secured, replace the indicator.
(2), Figure 95-15 indicates roll, in degrees, on the
moving roll scale (3). The position of the miniature 4. Return the trim knob to the zero trim position.
aircraft (1) indicates pitch, in degrees, on the pitch
scale (8), painted on the attitude sphere (4). A pitch
5. Open the ADI PLT circuit breaker (CB-E10).
trim knob (7) provides a means of adjustment of the
position of the miniature aircraft relative to the attitude
sphere to compensate for normal pitch attitude of the RESULT:
helicopter. A standard inclinometer (6) is located on
the front of the attitude indicator. An attitude warning • The OFF flag comes into view and the gyro
flag (5) comes into view when power to the indicator is decreases in speed and stops after several
no longer applied. minutes.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
95-62. Attitude Indicator Operational Check —
Pilot
• If the OFF flag does not appear, replace the
indicator.
Troubleshooting charts for the pilot altitude indicator
are in Figure 95-16. 6. Close the ADI PLT circuit breaker.
95-63. Attitude Indicator Operational Check —

NOTE
Copilot
Use external power during ground
maintenance procedures to prevent battery Troubleshooting charts for the copilot attitude indicator
depletion. are in Figure 95-17.
1. Connect the external power.

NOTE
RESULT:
maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
• Check that the ATT flag goes out of view
within 2 minutes. 1. Connect the external power.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 51
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-15. Attitude Indicator
95-00-00
Page 52 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-16. Pilot Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 53
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: from a standby battery system in case of total

electrical failure.
• Check that the ATT flag goes out of view
within 2 minutes. The pilot standby attitude indicator system includes
the components that follow:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• Standby attitude indicator (4M11)
• If the ATT flag does not disappear within the 2
minutes, refer to Trouble No. 1, Figure 95-17. • Standby power supply (4BT1)
2. Check that the display indicates properly and • DC bus 2 “ON” relay (4K1)
remains stable in both pitch and roll. If not, replace the
indicator.
• STBY ATTD switch (4S1)
3. Turn the pitch trim knob (at the lower center of the • STBY ATTD circuit breaker (4CB9)
indicator).
The pilot standby attitude indicator is a hermetically
RESULT: sealed, self contained instrument that operates on 28
VDC generator power or 22.5 VDC standby attitude
• The trim indicator moves up or down. battery (4BT1). The indicator contains a vertical gyro
that can be manually caged with the manual gimbal
CORRECTIVE ACTION: caging knob (5, Figure 95-18 and Figure 95-19) on the
lower right corner of the indicator bezel. An artificial
• If the trim indicator moves neither up nor down horizon display (8, Figure 95-18 or 7, Figure 95-19)
by rotation of the pitch trim knob, check if the registers displacement of the helicopter in the pitch
knob is properly secured. If the knob is and roll axes with respect to a miniature aircraft
properly secured, replace the indicator. symbol (7, Figure 95-18 or 6, Figure 95-19). The roll
index pointer (2) shows roll, in degrees, on the roll
4. Return the pitch trim knob to the zero trim index scale (3). The position of the miniature aircraft
position. symbol (7, Figure 95-18 or 6, Figure 95-19) indicates
pitch, in degrees, on the pitch index scale (4). A pitch
5. Open the ADI COPLT circuit breaker (CB-D9). trim knob (6, Figure 95-18) moves the aircraft symbol
up or down to eliminate pilot parallax error and to
RESULT: compensate for normal pitch variations in different
flight regimes. An OFF warning flag (1) warns of power
• The OFF flag comes into view and the gyro interruptions or gyro failure.
decreases in speed and stops after several
minutes. The instrument operates on 28 VDC emergency bus 1
through the STBY ATTD switch set to ON (overhead
CORRECTIVE ACTION: panel) or from a 22.5 VDC standby attitude battery
(4BT1) in case of total electrical failure when the STBY
• If the OFF flag does not appear, replace the ATTD switch is ON.
indicator.
The standby attitude indicator supplies the attitude
6. Close the ADI COPLT circuit breaker (CB-D9). display that follows to the pilot:
95-64. PILOT STANDBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR • 70° (dive) and 65° (climb) pitch attitude
display for jet electronics P/N
The pilot standby attitude indicator (Figure 95-18 and 504-0045-902 (Figure 95-18)
Figure 95-19) displays attitude information to the pilot
as a backup to the primary attitude indicator. Power is • 75° (dive) and 95° (climb) pitch attitude
provided to the standby attitude indicator from either display for sextant P/N H321EPM
the normal DC power system emergency bus 1 or (Figure 95-19)
95-00-00
Page 54 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-17. Copilot Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 55
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-18. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator (S/N 49001 through 49060 with SAFCS)
95-00-00
Page 56 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-19. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator

(S/N 49001 through 49060 with DAFCS and S/N 49061 and Subsequent)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 57
BHT-430-MM-10
• OFF warning flag (1) The standby power supply (4BT1) is a 22.5 VDC 18
dry cell battery. It provides an alternative power supply
• Roll index pointer (2) to the standby attitude indicator (4M11) if there is total
electrical failure with STBY ATTD switch push IN. The
• Roll index scale (3) battery power supply is located in the right side nose
compartment forward of the pilot foot pedals.
• Pitch index scale (4)
The STBY ATTD switch (4S1) is located on the left
• Manual gimbal caging knob (5) side of the overhead panel and turns the standby
attitude indicator on when the switch is pushed. The
• Pitch trim knob (6, Figure 95-18) switch lights change to green when the switch is
pushed IN.
• Miniature aircraft symbol (7, Figure 95-18 or 6,
Figure 95-19) A DC bus 2 “ON” relay (4K1) in the overhead panel at
FS.164.5, automatically switches the 5 VDC lighting
• Artificial horizon display (8, Figure 95-18 or 7, from the pilot instrument lighting power supply to either
Figure 95-19) the standby battery power supply or the DC
emergency bus 1, if there is a failure of the DC bus 2.
The standby attitude indicator automatically displays
the attitude sphere to within ±1.0° of vertical within 3 A STBY ATTD circuit breaker (CB-E2) on the
minutes of power application. overhead panel connects the emergency bus 1 to
provide normal power through the STBY ATTD switch
Pull the manual gimbal caging knob fully out to cage to the standby attitude indicator.
the indicator’s integral vertical gyro. The manual
caging mechanism is a non-locking system and
A STBY ATTD circuit breaker (4CB9) is in the right
returns to the uncaged position when the manual
nose compartment forward of the pilot foot pedals. It
caging knob is released.
protects the power line from the standby power battery
(4BT1) to the standby attitude indicator.
The artificial horizon display (8, Figure 95-18 or 7,
Figure 95-19) shows displacement of the helicopter in
95-65. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Normal
the pitch and roll axes with respect to a miniature
Operation
aircraft symbol (7, Figure 95-18 or 6, Figure 95-19).
The roll index pointer (2) shows roll, in degrees, on the When the STBY ATTD switch (4S1) is pushed in:
roll index scale (3).
• The STBY ATTD switch illuminates green.
The position of the miniature aircraft symbol (7,
Figure 95-18 or 6, Figure 95-19) indicates pitch, in • 28 VDC is supplied from the STBY ATTD IND
degrees, on the pitch index scale (4). circuit breaker (CBE2) through 4S1 to the pilot
standby attitude indicator. After about
A pitch trim knob (6, Figure 95-18) moves the 3 minutes, the pilot standby attitude indicator
miniature aircraft symbol (7, Figure 95-18 or 6, warning flag will move out of view and the
Figure 95-19) up or down to provide trim corrections attitude indicator may be erected by pulling
for a minimum of 10° of dive and 5° of climb. the manual gimbal caging knob.
The OFF warning flag on the left side of the indicator is • 5 volt indicator lighting is normally supplied
in view if: and dimmed from the pilot instrument lighting
system. With 28 VDC bus 2 energized and the
• Primary power is below 19 VDC. pilot instrument light control (8R12) turned
ON, 28 VDC is supplied to DC bus 2 “ON”
• The internal inverter power supply fails. relay (4K1) pin X1. Relay 4K1 will energize
and 5 VDC power is supplied from the 5 VDC
• The indicator spin motor decreases below power supply (8PS1) through contacts A1and
normal operating speed. A2 to the pilot standby attitude indicator.
95-00-00
Page 58 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
• If power is not available from DC bus 2, power 95-67. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator —
is removed from the DC bus 2 “ON” relay Removal
(4K1) pin X1, 4K1 will de-energize, and 28
VDC is supplied from the STBY ATT IND NOTE
circuit breaker (CB-E2) through a dropping
It may be necessary to remove pilot ADI to
resistor (4R1) and contacts A3 to A2 of 4K1 to
gain access to the Standby Attitude
give constant dimmed lighting to the indicator.
Indicator electrical connector.
• 28 VDC is supplied from the STBY ATT circuit To remove the pilot standby attitude indicator (1,
breaker (CBE2) to the standby attitude Figure 95-20, View A), proceed as follows:
indicator battery (4BT1) through a dropping
resistor (4R5) and circuit breaker (4CB9) to 1. Remove all electrical power from the helicopter.
maintain battery charge condition.
2. Remove the screws from the front of the pilot
instrument panel.
When the STBY ATTD switch (4S1) is pushed again,
the STBY ATTD switch illuminates white and the
3. Disconnect the electrical cable and remove the
standby attitude indicator warning flag moves into pilot standby attitude indicator (1).
view.
95-68. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator —
95-66. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Inspection
Emergency Operation (Failure of Normal
28 VDC Power) NOTE
The pilot standby attitude indicator is a
When the STBY ATTD switch is pushed in: sealed instrument. All repairs that include
replacement of instrument range marks
• The STBY ATTD switch illuminates green. must be conducted by an authorized
instrument repair station.
• A ground is provided through 4S1 for the pilot 1. Examine the pilot standby attitude indicator for
standby attitude indicator battery (4BT1), legible range marks and decals.
allowing the pilot standby attitude battery to
supply 22.5 VDC through circuit breaker 2. Examine the pilot standby attitude indicator for
(4CB9) to the pilot standby attitude indicator. loose, missing, or improperly installed hardware and
After about 3 minutes, the standby attitude for mounting security.
indicator warning flag moves out of view and
by pulling the manual gimbal caging knob, the 3. Examine the electrical system.
Standby Attitude Indicator erects.
4. Examine the system for a defective indicator.
• Lighting power is supplied from the standby Replace the indicator if necessary.
attitude battery (4BT1) through circuit breaker
(4CB9), dropping resistor (4R1), and contacts 5. Examine the system for a defective push-button
A3 to A1 of relay 4K1 to give constant dimmed switch (4S1) or defective circuit breakers (CB-E2 or
4CB9). Replace defective units if necessary.
lighting to the indicator.

When the STBY ATTD switch (4S1) is positioned out, Installation
the STBY ATTD switch illuminates white and the
Standby Attitude Indicator warning flag moves into To install the pilot standby attitude indicator (1,
view. Figure 95-20, View A), proceed as follows:
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 59
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-20. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator System Installation (S/N 49001 through 49058 with SAFCS)
95-00-00
Page 60 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
• The pilot standby attitude indicator internal

NOTE
lights come on dimly.
It may be necessary to remove the pilot ADI
to facilitate the installation of the pilot CORRECTIVE ACTION:
standby attitude indicator.
• If the OFF flag does not disappear in
1. Connect the electrical cable and install the pilot approximately 3 minutes, refer to Trouble
standby attitude indicator (1). No. 1, Figure 95-21.
2. Put the screws on the front of the pilot instrument • If the pilot standby attitude indicator internal
panel. lights do not come on dimly, refer to Trouble
No. 2, Figure 95-21.
Operational Check
CAUTION

PULL OUT THE PULL TO CAGE KNOB
AND RELEASE IT WITH CARE TO AVOID
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE DAMAGE TO THE DELICATE INTERNAL
MECHANISM.
Multimeter
4. Pull out the PULL TO CAGE knob.
Troubleshooting charts for the pilot standby attitude
indicator are on Figure 95-21. RESULT:
• The manual gimbal caging knob cages the

NOTE
gyro gimbals and erects the artificial horizon
The warning flag goes out of view within 3 display.
minutes (28 VDC nominal). If the power
supply is between 19 and 28 VDC, CORRECTIVE ACTION:
additional time is required for the spin
motor to reach operational speed. The • If the manual gimbal caging knob does not
warning flag should disappear within 6 cage the gyro gimbals and the artificial
minutes. horizon display does not erect, replace the
pilot standby attitude indicator.
NOTE
5. Release the PULL TO CAGE knob.
Do not connect the external power during
the test that follows.
RESULT:
1. Set the BATT switch (2S1) to OFF.
• The display erects and remains stable in the
pitch and roll axes.
2. Open the STBY ATT circuit breaker (CB-E2).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
3. Set the STBY ATTD switch (4S1) to ON.
• If the display does not erect and remain stable
RESULT: in the pitch and roll axes, replace the pilot
standby attitude indicator.
• The OFF warning flag goes out of view after
approximately 3 minutes. 6. Turn the pitch trim knob.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 61
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: • The OFF warning flag goes out of view within

3 minutes.
• The aircraft symbol moves either up and then
down or down and then up. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION: • If the STBY ATTD switch light does not

change from white to green, refer to Trouble
No. 3, Figure 95-21.
• If the pitch trim knob does not control the
aircraft symbol, replace the standby indicator.
• If the OFF warning flag does not go out of
view within 3 minutes, refer to Trouble No. 4,
7. Return the pitch trim knob to normal. Figure 95-21.
8. Set the STBY ATTD switch to OFF. 14. Turn the PLT INSTR light control to BRT.
RESULT: RESULT:
• The OFF warning flag comes into view • The pilot standby attitude indicator lights go
immediately. on.
• The pilot standby attitude indicator internal CORRECTIVE ACTION:

lights go out.
• If the pilot standby attitude indicator lights do
not go on, refer to Trouble No. 5,
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Figure 95-21.
• If the OFF warning flag does not appear

15. Open the INSTR PLT circuit breaker (CB-B14).
immediately and the pilot standby attitude
indicator internal lights stay on, replace the
STBY ATTD switch (4S1). 16. Connect a voltmeter to the pilot standby attitude
indicator battery pack’s (4BT1) positive and negative
battery terminals.
• If the OFF warning flag does not appear
immediately and the white indicator lights go
out, replace the pilot standby attitude RESULT:
indicator.
• The voltmeter indicates approximately 22.5
9. Open the STBY ATTD circuit breaker (4CB9). VDC.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
10. Connect external power to the helicopter.
• If voltmeter indicates less than 22.5 VDC,
11. Set the BATTERY switch to ON. refer to paragraph 95-73 and carry out an
operational check and a capacity test of the
battery pack.
12. Close the STBY ATTD circuit breaker (CB-E2).
17. Close the STBY ATTD circuit breaker (4CB9).

13. Set the STBY ATTD switch to ON.
RESULT:
RESULT:
• The voltmeter indicates a slight increase in
• The STBY ATTD switch light changes from battery voltage to indicate that charging
white to green. voltage is present.
95-00-00
Page 62 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-21. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts (Sheet 1 of 5)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 63
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-21. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator — Troubleshooting Charts (Sheet 2 of 5
95-00-00
Page 64 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 65
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 66 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 67
BHT-430-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NOTE
• If the voltmeter does not show a slight Do not use the voltage reading between the
increase in battery voltage, repair or replace battery case and the terminals as a criteria
wiring or components in JB2 between JB2J4 for rejection. Only the current flow is the
pin 56 and JB2J4 pin 70. determining criteria.
18. Set the STBY ATTD switch to OFF. 1. Electrical Leak Test
19. Close the INSTR PLT circuit breaker (CB-B14). a. Disconnect the wires from the emergency
battery (4BT1) and isolate them from electrical ground.
20. Remove external power from the helicopter.
b. Remove the power supply from the helicopter.
95-71. Pilot Standby Attitude Battery Power c. Set the multimeter’s range selector to the 500
Supply — Removal milliampere range or higher.
To remove the pilot standby attitude indicator battery d. Put the multimeter’s positive lead on the
power supply (6, Figure 95-20, View D), proceed as positive terminal of the battery (4BT1) and
follows: momentarily touch the multimeter’s negative lead to
any exposed metal on the battery case (use the
1. Move the nipples back on the cable and screws that hold the battery cover).
disconnect the electrical connections on the screws.
RESULT:
2. Remove the screws and washers.
• The multimeter reads less than 50 milliamps.
3. Remove the power supply.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
95-72. Pilot Standby Attitude Indicator Battery — • If the multimeter reading shows a current
Installation measurement greater than 50 milliamps,
reject the battery.
To install the pilot standby attitude indicator battery
power supply (6, Figure 95-20, View D), proceed as e. Connect the multimeter’s negative lead to the
follows: battery case.
1. Install the power supply. f. Decrease the multimeter’s current range until
any current flow is readable.
2. Install the screws and washers.
RESULT:
3. Reconnect the electrical connections on the
screws. • The multimeter reads less than 50 milliamps.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
4. Move the nipples forward on the cable.
• If the multimeter’s reading shows a current
95-73. Pilot Standby Attitude Battery Power measurement greater than 50 milliamps,
Supply — Operational Check reject the battery.
Do an electrical leak and capacity test on the battery g. Disconnect both of the multimeter’s leads
power supply (39563-001) in accordance with Chapter from the battery’s positive terminal and the battery
5, or whenever the unit fails. case.
95-00-00
Page 68 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
h. Set the multimeter’s range selector to the 500 b. Wait 2 hours after charging.
milliamps range or higher.
c. Carry out a timed discharge through a 15 ohm
i. Put the multimeter’s negative lead on the resistor until either 51 minutes passes or the battery
negative terminal of the battery (4BT1) and voltage drops to 18 volts.
momentarily touch the multimeter’s positive lead to
any exposed metal on the battery case (you can use d. If the battery provides 51 minutes of discharge
the screws that hold the battery cover). time, do step e and step f. If the battery does not
provide 51 minutes of discharge time with the voltage
RESULT: above 18 volts, go to step e and then do step g.
• The multimeter reads less than 50 milliamps. e. Permit the battery to cool down for a minimum
of 2 hours.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
f. Recharge the battery at a constant current
• If the multimeter’s reading shows a current rate of 190 milliamps for 14 to 16 hours and then do
measurements greater than 50 milliamps, step k.
reject the battery.
g. Recharge the battery at a constant current
j. Connect the multimeter’s positive lead to the rate of 190 milliamps for 24 hours.
battery case.
k. Decrease the multimeter’s current range until

CAUTION
RESULT: DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY VOLTAGE TO

DROP BELOW 18 VOLTS. PERMANENT
• The multimeter reads less than 50 milliamps. DAMAGE TO THE BATTERY DUE TO
CELL REVERSAL CAN OCCUR.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
h. Do a timed discharge through a 15 ohm
• If the multimeter’s reading shows a current resistor until either 51 minutes passes or the battery
measurements greater than 50 milliamps, voltage drops to 18 volts.
reject the battery.
i. If the battery provides 51 minutes of discharge
l. Disconnect both of the multimeter’s leads from time, do step e to step g.
the battery negative terminal and battery’s case.
j. If the battery does not provide 51 minutes of
2. Battery Capacity Test discharge time with the voltage above 18 volts, reject
the battery.
a. Charge the battery with constant current at a
rate of 190 milliamps for 14 to 16 hours. k. Install the emergency power supply battery
(4BT1) and reconnect the wires to the battery.
CAUTION
DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY VOLTAGE TO

DROP BELOW 18 VOLTS. PERMANENT
DAMAGE TO THE BATTERY DUE TO
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 69/70
BHT-430-MM-10
NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS
95-74. NAVIGATION INSTRUMENTS 95-77. Standby Magnetic Compass — Inspection
The navigation instruments system consists of an 1. Examine the compass for loose, missing, or
electromechanical navigation installation or an EFIS improperly installed hardware.
navigation installation.
2. Examine the compass for readability of marks.
The electromechanical navigation (with copilot
instruments installed) consists of:
3. Examine for broken, scratched, or loose glass.
• Standby magnetic compass
4. Make sure there is sufficient liquid in the bowl.
• Pilot and copilot course deviation indicators
95-78. Standby Magnetic Compass — Repair or
• Pilot horizontal situation indicator Replacement
• Copilot directional gyro indicator

NOTE
The EFIS navigation installation (with copilot An authorized instrument repair station
instruments installed) consists of: must do all repairs of a standby magnetic
compass.
• Standby magnetic compass
1. Replace the compass if the float chamber leaks
• Pilot and copilot EADI or if there is insufficient liquid in the bowl.
• Pilot and copilot EHSI 2. Replace the compass if glass is loose, broken,
scratched, cracked, or loose.
• Pilot and copilot course deviation indicators
95-79. Standby Magnetic Compass — Installation
95-75. STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS
1. Remove the cap or cover and connect the
The standby magnetic compass (Figure 95-22) is a
electrical connector.
non-stabilized, magnetic-type instrument mounted on
the center windshield post.
2. Carefully put the compass onto the mounting
95-76. Standby Magnetic Compass — Removal bracket.
3. Install the mounting screws. Calibrate the

compass (paragraph 95-81).
CAUTION
95-80. Standby Magnetic Compass —
MAKE SURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL Troubleshooting
POWER IS REMOVED BEFORE YOU DO
THE FOLLOWING. Do the steps as necessary to isolate the problem.
1. Remove the mounting screws from the bracket. 1. If there is an excessive card error, evaluate step 2
through step 5 or calibrate the compass (paragraph
2. Carefully remove the compass. 95-81).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and seal the 2. If there is improper compensation, compensate
connector with a cap. the compass.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 71
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-22. Standby Magnetic Compass
95-00-00
Page 72 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
3. If there is external magnetic interference, locate it 4. Put the helicopter on a west magnetic heading
and eliminate it, if possible. and write down the compass deviation from 270°.
4. If there is air in the bowl, replace the compass. 5. Put the helicopter on a north magnetic heading
and write down the compass deviation from 0°.
5. If there is insufficient liquid in the bowl, replace
the compass. 6. Determine index error C (refer to paragraph
95-82).
95-81. Standby Magnetic Compass Calibration —
Compass Rose Method
NOTE
Use a non-metallic screwdriver to make all
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED corrections. Tap the compass lightly after
each adjustment and allow time to settle
before you take your readings.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
7. With the helicopter still on a north heading, adjust
Non-Magnetic the “C” compensating screw to cause the compass
Screwdriver reading to change ± an amount equal to index error C.
8. Put the helicopter on an east magnetic heading.

NOTE Write down the deviation from 90°.
Before you compensate the standby
magnetic compass, make sure that 9. Determine the index error B (refer to paragraph
compass fluid is clear and no air bubbles 95-82).
show when the compass is in the normal
position. Also make sure that the card is 10. Adjust the “B” compensator screw to cause the
level and, when deflected a few degrees on compass reading to change plus or minus an amount
each side of equilibrium position, it returns equal to index error B.
to the original position.
11. With the helicopter still on an east heading,
Remove any magnetic objects, such as determine index error A (refer to paragraph 95-82).
trucks, automobiles, power carts, towing
arms, or other aircraft from the compass
12. If index error A exceeds 1°, compensate by
rose, to the point where they have no effect
turning face of compass relative to plane of bracket.
on the compass system.
Adjust compass to cause reading to change plus or
During the swinging procedure, set normal minus an amount equal to index A.
electrical and avionics equipment to on.
Make sure flight controls are in neutral. 13. Put the helicopter on eight magnetic headings
Make sure that personnel engaged in the approximately 30° apart to swing the helicopter for
procedure are free of metallic materials. residual deviation.
Pay particularly attention to the presence of
tools in the cockpit area. 14. On the compass correction card, write the
compass reading that corresponds to each of the eight
1. Put the helicopter on the compass rose. headings. The difference between the maximum
positive deviation and the minimum negative deviation
2. Align the dots on the screws with the dots on the of all readings must not exceed 7°.
compass to set the compass compensators to null
effect. 95-82. Standby Magnetic Compass Index Error
Chart
3. Put the helicopter on a south magnetic heading
and write down the compass deviation from 180°. Compute the index error algebraically as follows:
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 73
BHT-430-MM-10
• Index error C = [(North Deviation) x 1/2] –

[(South Deviation) x 1/2]
CAUTION
• Index error B = [(East Deviation) x 1/2] –
[(West Deviation) x 1/2] FOR IDENTIFICATION, THE COLOR OF
T HE S IG HT CO MPAS S IS RED A ND
• Index error A = [(North Deviation) x 1/4] + MUST NEVER, UNDER ANY
[(East Deviation) x 1/4] + [(South Deviation) CIRCUMSTANCES, BE USED AS AN
x 1/4] + [(West Deviation) x 1/4] AIRCRAFT COMPASS.
Refer to Table 95-1 for example. NOTE

You can use the sight compass method
1. Index error C = [– 6.5 x 1/2] – [+4.5 x 1/2] = –11 x
instead of the compass rose method to
1/2 = –5.5°
calibrate the standby magnetic compass
when a compass rose is not available.
2. Index error B = [0 x 1/2] – [–6 x 1/2] = +6 x 1/2 =
+3° A sight compass is a remagnetized
standard aircraft compass so that the card
3. Index error A = [–6.5 x 1/4] + [0 x 1/4] + [+4.5 x 1/ indicates 180° away from normal. The
4] + [–6 x 1/4] = –8 x 1/4 = –2°. compensating magnets are removed and a
sighting device is added. Because the sight
compass card indicates 180° away from
normal, it lets the operator stand and face
Table 95-1. Example of Deviations with the helicopter to make it easier to transmit
Compensator Set to Null Effects signals to and from the pilot.
MAGNETIC COMPASS For guaranteed accuracy, every 30 days,

HEADING HEADING DEVIATION observe some distant object at least 1 mile
(0.6 km) away which is prominent and of
South 180° 175.5° +4.5° which the magnetic bearing is known to
West 270° 276.0° –6.0° check the sight compass. The sight
compass is held and sighted as described
North 000° 006.5° –6.5° for the helicopter so that the collimating
lines of the sight lens line up with the
East 090° 090.0° 0° distant object. The indication on the
compass card should indicate exactly 180°
95-83. Standby Magnetic Compass Calibration — from the known magnetic bearing to the
Sight Compass Method distant object chosen.
During the swinging procedure, allow a

MATERIALS REQUIRED minimum of 30 feet (9.15 m) between the
helicopter that is swung and the operator
Refer to BHT-ALL-SPM for specifications. who uses the sight compass.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 1. Make sure that the area in which the helicopter is
swung is level and free from all ferrous materials such
Non-Magnetic
as reinforcing steel, metal pipes, and electrical
Screwdriver
conduits.
Model 1234F or Sight Compass
Equivalent 2. Make sure that the area is at least 100 yards
(91.5 m) from any other aircraft, railroads, buildings,
and power lines.
95-00-00
Page 74 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
8. With the helicopter on a heading of magnetic

NOTE
North (000°), turn the compensating screw (C), so that
During the swinging procedure, set normal the compass indicates exactly North (000°).
electrical and avionics equipment to on.
Make sure flight controls are in neutral. 9. With the helicopter on a heading of magnetic East
Make sure that personnel engaged in the (090°), turn the compensating screw (B) until compass
procedure are free from metallic materials. indicates exactly East (090°).
Pay particularly attention to the presence of
tools in the cockpit area.
10. With the helicopter on a heading of magnetic
South (180°), turn the compensating screw (C) to
The sight compass must be held as level as correct one half of any observed error.
possible and sighting through the sighting
lens should be to the exact center of the
helicopter. 11. With the helicopter on a heading of magnetic
West (270°), turn the screw (B) to correct one half of
any observed error.
Allow sufficient time for the compass card
to stabilize before you take readings.
12. Start with the final heading after the
compensating procedure described above and turn
Take a series of three readings before you
the helicopter to each successive 30° heading.
assume the readings are correct.
Observe and write down the compass error at each
heading. Make sure that the maximum deviation on
3. Taxi or tow the helicopter to approximately the any 30° heading does not exceed ±7°.
desired heading, as indicated on the compass, to be
compensated.
13. Fill in the approved correction card in ink, and
show the compass indication for each heading,
4. Stand directly in front of the helicopter and use helicopter number, compass serial number, compass
the sight compass. location, date of swing, and initials of the technicians
that did the swing. A copy of the swinging record must
remain on file.
5. Properly align the sight compass on the
centerline of the helicopter.
14. Install the properly documented card in the
helicopter compass card holder.
6. Observe the exact heading of the helicopter and
write down any error that exists between the sight
95-84. COPILOT DIRECTIONAL GYRO
compass and helicopter compass that is INDICATOR
compensated.
The copilot directional gyro indicator system operates

7. Move the helicopter until the helicopter heading on the 28 VDC bus 1. The copilot directional gyro
and the indication of the sight compass are correct for system includes the system that follows:
the desired magnetic heading to correct whatever
error exists between the sight compass and helicopter • Directional gyro indicator (5M5)
heading.
• HSI copilot circuit breaker (CBB9)
NOTE
The directional gyro indicator is installed in the copilot
Use a non-metallic screwdriver to make all instrument panel directly in front of the copilot. The
corrections. Tap the compass lightly after directional gyro contains a gyro and an automatic
each adjustment and allow time to settle erection system and supplies heading information on a
before you take readings. compass card (3, Figure 95-23) to the pilot.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 75
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-23. Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator
95-00-00
Page 76 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
The directional gyro indicator (Figure 95-23) is a approximate heading of the helicopter relative
self-contained instrument that operates on 28 VDC to magnetic North.
essential bus 1 from the HSI COPLT circuit breaker
(CB-B9) located on the overhead panel. The input CORRECTIVE ACTION:
voltage is applied to an internal inverter, which
converts the DC input into two-phase AC power to
• If the OFF flag does not go out of view after 3
drive the gyro assembly. After ±3 minutes, the gyro
minutes, refer to Trouble No. 1, Figure 95-24.
assembly operates at full speed and the directional
gyro indicator warning flag moves out of view.
3. Set the gyro for 0°.
A compass card setting knob (4) lets you adjust the

RESULT:
compass card (3) to any desired heading. To operate
the compass card setting knob (4), push the knob and
• The display remains stable.
then turn it left or right.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
A fixed aircraft symbol (1) indicates the heading of the
helicopter. • If the gyro drifts excessively, replace the gyro.
An OFF warning flag (2) (red bar) on the right side of 4. Open the HSI COPLT circuit breaker (CBB9).
the indicator is in view during the circumstances that
follow: RESULT:
• Primary power is below 19 VDC and • The OFF flag comes into view immediately
and the gyro begins to lose speed and stops
• Internal power fails and after several minutes.
• Indicator spin motor speed decreases below CORRECTIVE ACTION:

normal operating speed.
• If the OFF flag does not appear immediately
and the gyro does not lose speed, replace the
95-85. Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator — circuit breaker (CBB9).
Operational Check
• If the OFF flag does not appear immediately
Troubleshooting charts for the copilot directional gyro and the gyro begins to lose speed, replace the
are in Figure 95-24. copilot directional gyro indicator.
5. Close the HSI COPLT circuit breaker (CBB9).

NOTE
Use external power during ground 95-86. COURSE DEVIATION INDICATORS
depletion. The pilot and copilot course deviation indicators
(Figure 95-25) display navigation information from the
1. Connect external power. NAV 1 receiver. Refer to Chapter 97 for the complete
description and operation of the course deviation
2. Observe the copilot directional gyro indicator. indicators.
95-87. Course Deviation Indicators — Operational

RESULT: Check
• The OFF flag on the heading indicator The course deviation indicators are operationally
(directional gyro) goes out of view within 3 checked with the associated avionics system (Chapter
minutes and the gyro erects and indicates the 97).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 77
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-24. Copilot Directional Gyro Indicator — Troubleshooting Chart
95-00-00
Page 78 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-25. Course Deviation Indicator
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 79
BHT-430-MM-10
95-88. Course Deviation Indicators — 4. 85° and 360° EHSI formats that can display
Troubleshooting weather and NAV map and HSI data, from up to two
navigation sources, and distance information.
Troubleshooting of the course deviation indicators is
done when troubleshooting the associated avionics 5. The ability to declutter displays and allow for
system (Chapter 97). efficient interpretation of data.
6. A cross-comparator system between all displays

95-89. ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT in a four-tube installation.
SYSTEM (EFIS)
7. Continuous diagnostic testing to identify sensor
The EFIS consists of the Electronic Attitude Direction failures and display a warning flag.
Indicator (EADI) and Electronic Horizontal Situation
Indicator (EHSI). 8. A composite reversionary mode if one of the
displays fails to allow continued system operation.
The EFIS display uses Active Matrix Color Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD) screens with a built-in Symbol 9. Advanced maintenance displays to enhance
Generator (SG) to display flight information in a troubleshooting and system checkout.
multicolored graphic format on the EADI and EHSI.
Weather radar, if installed, can be displayed on the 10. EADI and EHSI are fully interchangeable.
EHSI. Some of the features of the Rogerson Kratos
NEONAV 5000 EFIS system are: 95-90. Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
(EHSI)
1. Presentation of attitude, navigation, heading, and Refer to Chapter 97 for the complete description and
radar information on the EHSI and EADI displays. operation of the EHSI.
2. Display of autopilot and flight director mode 95-91. Electronic Attitude Direction Indicator
annunciations. (EADI)
Refer to Chapter 97 for the complete description and

3. Display of radar altimeter information. operation of the EADI.
95-00-00
Page 80 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
INTEGRATED INSTRUMENT DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)
95-92. INTEGRATED INSTRUMENT DISPLAY • P/N 430-375-001-105 with software version

SYSTEM (IIDS) 29.0
• P/N 430-375-001-109 with software version

1.0
WARNING
• P/N 430-375-001-107 with software version
31.0
DO NOT OPERATE THE IIDS IF THE BUS
V O LTA G E I S L E S S T H A N 2 0 V D C • P/N 430-375-001-111 and -113 with software
DURING THE MAINTENANCE version 3.0
OPERATION.
The -105 and -109 displays are identical in functionality
The Integrated Instrument Display System (IIDS) and are completely interchangeable. The only
consists of a single self-contained unit with dual active difference between these two versions is the
matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens, dual manufacturer origin of the LCD glass.
power supplies, and dual processors (Figure 95-26).
The IIDS displays accurately and processes all The -107, -111, and -113 displays are identical in
airframe and engine instrumentation information and functionality and are completely interchangeable. The
caution and warning annunciations. The IIDS also only difference between these two versions is the
monitors and records engine parameters, exceedance, manufacturer origin of the LCD glass.
and faults in a non-volatile memory for maintenance
purposes. The -107, -111, and -113 displays offer improvements
to the display and maintenance functionality.
The DU 427-375-001-113 has 2 internal fans to cool
the unit, one for each channel. A new Liquid Crystal Reference to the -105/-109 and -107/-111/-113 displays
Display (LCD) and LED display back lighting. Lamp are added to the descriptions, illustrations, and checks,
heater are used to warm the DU at low temperature. where applicable, throughout Chapter 95 and Chapter
96 of this manual.
The dual processors and the two independent displays
ensure that the failure of one processor or display does 95-93. DESCRIPTION
not cause the loss of any displayed information.
All of the inputs to the IIDS, except the fuel quantity
The IIDS has a total of five flight display formats. Three system, are separately processed and displayed so
of the display formats show normal flight operation that a single failure does not cause the complete loss
data, one is a combination of two of the normal flight of the same parameter. The right side fuel quantity
displays, that is used for engine starts, and one is a indication system is only processed by the right IIDS
composite format that provides flight information in CPU and the left fuel quantity indication system is only
case of a single channel failure. processed by the left IIDS CPU. If one of the CPUs is
lost, then its associated fuel sensor is also lost.
A set of ten soft keys are at the bottom of the IIDS
screens. The soft keys are used to select various To offer maximum redundancy all of the engine inputs
functions on the IIDS screens. to the IIDS are duplicated. Each input is obtained as an
Arinc 429 data bus input directly from the No. 1 and
A brightness control is located at the bottom of each No. 2 FADEC-ECU and as a direct analog input from
screen to allow independent display dimming. An engine No. 1 and No. 2 sensors.
ambient light sensor is also located at the bottom of
each screen to automatically adjust the display In normal operation, the right display screen shows the
brightness with changes in the ambient light. primary flight display (Figure 95-27) and the left display
screen shows the secondary flight display page 1
The IIDS display installed on the Model 430 is currently (Figure 95-28), the secondary flight display page 2
available in four hardware versions: (Figure 95-28), or the start page (Figure 95-29).
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-26. IIDS Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 82 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-27. IIDS Primary Flight Display
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 83
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-28. IIDS Secondary Flight Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 84 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-28. IIDS Secondary Flight Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 85
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-29. IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Start Page
95-00-00
Page 86 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
As all of the inputs are separately processed by the • Engine oil temperature and pressure
dual IIDS CPUs it is also possible to swap the left
display with the right display, as a convenience to the • Transmission oil temperature and pressure
pilot if the helicopter is flown from the copilot position.
• Hydraulic oil temperature and pressure

If there is a failure of either of the display screens, the
serviceable screen can be selected to the composite
mode (Figure 95-30). The composite mode screen • Fuel quantity
displays all of the primary flight parameters, all of the
cautions and warning annunciations, fuel quantity, • Auxiliary fuel quantity (if installed)
engine oil pressure, transmission oil pressure, and the
clock. • Fuel temperature (tank)
The IIDS also performs the following functions: • Clock
• IIDS internal fault monitoring • Outside air temperature (OAT)
• Fuel tank calibration • DC generator voltmeter
• Power assurance function • Battery voltmeter
• One Engine Inoperative (OEI) flags and • DC Generator ammeter

recording (through data bus link)
• Caution/warning/advisory
Emergency bus 1 and emergency bus 2 supply a 28 annunciation display
VDC power to the IIDS. Circuit breaker (CB-E8) on
emergency bus 1 and circuit breaker (CB-E11) on • AC voltmeter
emergency bus 2 provide IIDS channel 1 internal
power supply. Circuit breaker (CBE7) on emergency
• Fuel flow (if installed)
bus 1 and circuit breaker (CB-E12) on emergency bus
2 provide IIDS channel 2 internal power supply. For
maximum redundancy, each IIDS channel can display The IIDS also monitors and records engine
all engine No. 1 and No. 2 information independently. parameters exceedance and faults in a Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) for maintenance purposes.
The IIDS displays:

The IIDS also possesses the following functions:
• Engine torque indication

• Mast torque calibration
• Mast torque indication

• Fuel tank calibration
• Rotor speed (NR) • Maintenance diagnostics
• Engine shaft speed (NP) • Storage of engine data and history
• Engine gas producer speed (NG) • System configuration settings
• Measured gas temperature (MGT) • System parameter set-up
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 87
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-30. IIDS Composite Mode Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 88 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
RTR BRK AP I HYD 2 START

BATT TEMP SCAS I INV 2 I A/ICE 2
1 GEN 2 AUTO TRIM DR LOCK
ENG OIL FUEL AUX FUEL XMSN OIL
888PSI888 8888LBS8888 888LBS 888PSI
OVSPD OVSPD 30 SEC OEI
NP NR NP Q MQ Q
188 188 188 188 188
12 12 12 9 12 12 12
11 11 11
8 8 6 6
5
TIME GMT
0 0 0 88:88 0 0 0
430MM_95_0103
Figure 95-30. IIDS Composite Mode Display (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-94. IIDS FUNCTIONAL KEYS • The C/S (CLOCK SEL) sets the clock
annunciations modes, such as Greenwich
The IIDS unit front bezel provides function keys and Mean Time (GMT), Local Time (LT), Elapsed
function identification to allow flight crew and ground Time (EL) and Elapsed Time Countdown
personnel interaction (Figure 95-31). (ETD).
The right screen (primary display) function keys are • The C/C (CLOCK CONT) starts and resets the
defined from the left to the right as follows: Elapsed Time (EL).
• The SEL key (same as secondary screen). In addition to the soft keys, a brightness knob is
When the displays are swapped with SWAP located at the bottom of each screen to allow
key, SEL key sets page 1, page 2, and start independent display to dim from full to minimum
page. brightness. An ambient light sensor is also located at
the bottom of each screen to automatically adjust the
display brightness with ambient light changes. Lighting
• The SWAP key makes the secondary display
power is supplied from the center instrument panel
change over to primary display and vice
lighting dimmer.
versa. When activated a second time, the
displays revert back to the original
configuration. 95-95. IIDS FLIGHT DISPLAY FORMATS
• The C key sets the composite (reversionary) The IIDS provides a total of five flight display formats:
display on both screens. If you press it a
second time, it reverts back to the standard • Primary flight display format (Figure 95-27)
primary/secondary configuration.
• Secondary flight display page 1 format
• The CHIP key triggers the fuzz burner output (Figure 95-28)
to the fuzz burner control unit, after a chip
warning is annunciated.
• Secondary flight display page 2 format
(Figure 95-28)
• The TEST key initiates the Built-In-Test (BIT)
function.
• Secondary flight display start page format
(Figure 95-29)
The left screen (secondary display) function keys
(Figure 95-31) are defined from the left to the right as
• Composite mode flight display (Figure 95-30)
follows:
The secondary screen can be scrolled between the

• The SEL key sets page 1 (Figure 95-28),
flight page 1, flight page 2, and the start page by using
page 2 (Figure 95-28), and the start page
the SEL key below the IIDS LH screen or by using the
(Figure 95-29).
IIDS scroll switch on the pilot collective stick.
• The UP key scrolls up the warning/caution

messages when more than 12 messages NOTE
appear in the message window. The IIDS screen on the P/N
430-375-001-105/-109 displays and the
• The DN key scrolls down the warning/caution P/N 430-375-001-107/-111/-113 displays
messages when more than 12 messages may vary, depending on the software (S/W)
appear in the message window. version installed.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-31. IIDS Function Keys
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 91
BHT-430-MM-10
95-96. IIDS Primary Flight Display • Caution/warning/advisory annunciator display
The IIDS primary flight display (Figure 95-27) (which is 95-99. IIDS Secondary Display Formats — Start
closer to the pilot) displays the information that follows: Page
• Engine measured gas temperature (MGT) Access to the start page can be done only if either one
or both engines are not running. After starting the
• Engine torque (Q) second engine it is necessary to scroll to the
secondary flight display page 1. The IIDS secondary
• Mast torque (MQ) display start page (Figure 95-29) displays the
information that follows:
• Engine shaft speed (NP)
• Engine oil pressure
• Gas producer speed (NG)
• Transmission oil pressure
• Rotor speed (NR)
• Generator volts and amps
• One engine inoperative (OEI)
• Battery voltage
• Overspeed and FADEC-ECU flags
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
95-97. IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Page 1
• Start timer
The IIDS secondary flight display page 1
(Figure 95-28) located further from the pilot displays • Fuel temperature
the following:
• Caution/warning/advisory annunciator display
• Engine and transmission oil temperature and
pressure 95-100. IIDS Composite Mode Display
• Fuel quantity (left tank, right tank, and total The IIDS composite mode display format
fuel quantity) (Figure 95-30) includes:
• Outside air temperature (OAT) indication • All of the parameters displayed on the normal
primary page
• Clock
• A digital display only of engine No. 1, engine
• Caution/warning/advisory annunciator display No. 2, transmission oil pressures, left and right
fuel quantity, auxiliary fuel quantity, clock, and
95-98. IIDS Secondary Flight Display — Page 2 caution/warning/advisory annunciator display
The IIDS secondary display format page 2 95-101. IIDS BUILT-IN-TEST (BIT)
(Figure 95-28) displays the information that follows:
The IIDS provides for three different levels of
• Hydraulic fluid temperature and pressure Built-In-Tests (BIT). These tests are a power-on
Built-In-Test, a continuous Built-In-Test, and a
• Generator voltage and amps commanded Built-In-Test.
• Battery voltage 1. The power-on BIT makes sure of the complete

integrity of the system, such as power inputs, power
• AC voltage (inverter) supplies, Non Volatile Memory (NVM), Random
Access Memory (RAM), processors, watch dog timer,
• Auxiliary fuel quantity (if installed) and graphic card integrity.
95-00-00
Page 92 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
2. The continuous BIT makes sure of the integrity of 4. At the end of the BIT, the screen displays the
the input and output circuits and the processing loops. following: IIDS, S/W, XX.X, YY-MM-DD, HH:MM,
BITE:PASSED (or FAILED).
3. The commanded BIT, makes sure of the display
(pixels) integrity and is initiated by pressing the TST 5. The screen returns to the flight screen formats.
button below the primary screen display. The test
sequence will last until the TST button is released or 4
seconds elapse (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) or 6 NOTE
seconds elapse (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and If 80% of the NVM is exceeded, there is a
-113). possibility that any faults/exceedances
stored in the NVM will be overwritten
When the TST button is pressed (-107, -111, and
-113), the right hand display reverts to composite 6. If 80% of NVM is exceeded, the message
mode and the left hand display starts the commanded DOWNLOAD EPROM displays at the end of the BIT.
BIT test sequence. After 3 seconds elapse (following
the end of the left hand screen test sequence), the left
95-102. IIDS FAILURE ANNUNCIATION
hand display reverts to composite mode and the right
hand display starts the commanded BIT test
If the IIDS experiences any internal faults or a loss of
sequence. The test sequence will ensure that the
input signal, it provides the following indications on the
screen opposite to the one entering test mode is
displays (Table 95-2 and Table 95-3).
forced into composite mode prior to engaging the test
display.
Table 95-2. IIDS Failure Annunciation
TYPE OF FAULT EFFECTS
Loss of power supply Blank screen
Loss of input signal 1) Fail caution at the bottom of the scale on the primary screen
2) Removal of the cursor and ribbon (when applicable) and a flashing "....."
displayed in the digital readout
Loss of a processor Blank screen or an amber failure code on the affected screen
Processing error Blank screen or an amber failure code on the affected screen
Loss of memory Blank screen or an amber failure code on the affected screen
Internal component fault IIDS caution appear on both displays
Loss of data link between IIDS caution appear on both displays

channel 1 and channel 2
Table 95-3. IIDS Fault Codes
CODE REASON ACTION
A011 CPU error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A012 RAM error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A016 Instruction violation error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A017 Bus error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Table 95-3. IIDS Fault Codes (Cont)
CODE REASON ACTION
A034 RAM missing Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A035 EPROM missing Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A036 EEPROM Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A041 Instruction fetch fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)

A051 RAM read fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A052 RAM write fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A053 Supervisor RAM read fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A054 Supervisor RAM write fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A061 EEPROM read fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A062 EEPROM write fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A063 IO device read fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A064 IO device write fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A065 MBUS read fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A066 MBUS write fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A071 Address error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A072 Illegal instruction Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A073 Chk/Chk2 fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A074 Privilege violation Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A075 Line 1011 emulator fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A076 Line 1111 emulator fault Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)

A077 Coprocessor protocol violation Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
A078 Format error Reset IIDS (paragraph 95-103)
95-103. RESETTING THE IIDS 2. Open the IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8,
CB-E11, and CB-E12).
WARNING 3. Close the IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8,

DO NOT OPERATE THE IIDS IF THE BUS 4. If this procedure does not work, the IIDS screen
V O LTA G E I S L E S S T H A N 2 0 V D C has to be "RESET/REBOOT". If the fault is on the
DURING THE MAINTENANCE primary screen (right hand side screen), the primary
OPERATION. screen has to be "RESET". If the fault is on the
secondary screen (left side screen), the secondary
1. Apply external power to the helicopter. screen has to be "RESET". If it is required to "RESET"
95-00-00
Page 94 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
both the primary and secondary screens, the screens 10. Record the data that shows on the Configuration
have to be reset individually. screen.
95-104. RESET/REBOOT OF IIDS PRIMARY (RH) 11. Press the MENU 1 switch.
SCREEN
12. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen

(Figure 95-32), select 10 – MAST TORQUE
CALIBRATION using the DN switch.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE 13. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen,

(Figure 95-33), select SET K9 using the DN switch.
430-275-001 Maintenance Harness
14. Press the SEL switch.
WARNING
15. Record the mast torque K9.
DO NOT OPERATE THE IIDS IF THE BUS 16. Press the RTN switch to exit the maintenance
V O LTA G E I S L E S S T H A N 2 0 V D C
screen.
DURING THE MAINTENANCE
OPERATION.
NOTE
1. Apply external power to the helicopter.
Following IIDS "RESET/REBOOT", all
2. Connect the maintenance harness assembly, P/N previous data that was recorded in the
430-275-001, to connector 4J71 on the left side of the affected IIDS channel, such as ECU faults,
pedestal. engine exceedances, engine data, engine
history, etc. is deleted.
3. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL

switch and the C/C switch together and hold for 4 17. Open the IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8,
seconds to enter the LH maintenance screen. CB-E11, and CB-E12).
4. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen 18. Below the IIDS primary screen, press the SEL
(Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN switch and TST switch together and hold (as if to
switch. access the maintenance screen).
5. Record the data for engine No. 1. 19. While still holding the SEL switch and TST switch,
close the two IIDS primary screen circuit breakers
6. On the Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34), press (CB-E8 and CB-E12).
ENG 2.
RESULT:
7. Record the data for engine No. 2.
• A message appears on the IIDS primary
8. Press the MENU 1 switch. screen which asks for a password to be
entered.
(Figure 95-32), select 9 – CONFIGURATION using the 20. Release the SEL and C/C switches and enter
DN switch. password 2311.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-32. IIDS Maintenance Functions Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 96 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
IIDS DATA PAGES
1 - POWER ASSURANCE CHECK

2 - ENGINE DATA
3 - ECU-ENGINE SYSTEM STATUS
4 - ENGINE EXCEEDANCES
SHADED IN
GRAY WHILE 5 - IIDS REVISION-FAULTS
IN FLIGHT
6 - ENGINE HISTORY
7 - PARAMETER SET-UP
8 - FUEL CALIBRATION
9 - CONFIGURATION
10-MAST TORQUE CALIBRATION
430MM_95_0104
Figure 95-32. IIDS Maintenance Functions Display (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and, -113) (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-33. Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 5)
95-00-00
Page 98 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-33. Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 2 of 5)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 99
BHT-430-MM-10
MAST TORQUE
SET K1: 8.54 SET K5: 8600

SET K2: 6.78 SET K6: 189256
SET K3: -6.23 SET K7: -0.6
SET K4: -9.98 SET K8: 1.0
SET K9: -5370
MEASURED LINKS
LF = -X.X RF = +XX.X
LA = +XX.X RA = -X.X
430MM_95_0111
Figure 95-33. Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) (Sheet 3 of 5)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
MAST TORQUE CALIBRATION
ADJUST K3 CONSTANT
K3: X.XX
MEASURED LINKS
2 NEXT DIGIT +1 ACCEPT
NOTE
1. Constant adjustment menu (typical for all constants except K9).
430MM_95_0112
Figure 95-33. Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-107 -111, and -113) (Sheet 4 of 5)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
ADJUST K9 CONSTANT
K9: -XXXX
MEASURED LINKS
AUTO CALC
NOTE
1. Constant adjustment menu (K9 only).
430MM_95_0113
Figure 95-33. Mast Torque Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-107 -111, and -113) (Sheet 5 of 5)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-34. Engine Data Display
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 103
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: 35. Enter the mast torque K9, recorded in step 15.
• The IIDS primary screen then starts flashing

36. Press the RTN switch to exit the maintenance
and displays "HVM INIT" (blue in color) for
screen.
about 1 minute and then the screen should
return to normal. If the screen does not return
to normal, advise Product Support RESULT:
Engineering.
• The IIDS primary screen should display the
21. Close the two IIDS secondary screen circuit normal IIDS display.
breakers (CB-E7 and CB-E11).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
22. Carry out a fuel calibration (paragraph 95-174,
paragraph 95-175, or paragraph 95-175A). • If the IIDS primary screen does not display the
normal IIDS display after resetting, replace the
IIDS.
23. Below the IIDS primary screen, press the SEL
switch and the TST switch together and hold for 4
seconds to enter the RH maintenance screen. 95-105. RESET/REBOOT OF IIDS SECONDARY
(LH) SCREEN
(Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN
switch. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
25. Enter the data recorded in step 5 for engine No. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
1.
26. On the Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34), press
ENG 2.
WARNING
27. Enter the data recorded in step 7 for engine No.
2.
DO NOT OPERATE THE IIDS IF THE BUS
28. Press the MENU 1 switch. V O LTA G E I S L E S S T H A N 2 0 V D C
29. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen OPERATION.
(Figure 95-32), select 9 – CONFIGURATION using the
DN switch. 1. Apply external power to the helicopter.
30. Enter the data recorded in step 10 on the 2. Connect the maintenance harness assembly, P/N
Configuration screen. 430-275-001, to connector 4J71, on the left side of the
pedestal.
31. Press the MENU 1 switch.
32. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen switch and the TST switch together and hold for 4
(Figure 95-32), select 10 – MAST TORQUE seconds to enter the RH maintenance screen.
33. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen (Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN
(Figure 95-33), select SET K9 using the DN switch. switch.
34. Press the SEL switch. 5. Record the data for engine No. 1.
95-00-00
Page 104 Rev. 17 1 SEP 2009 ECCN EAR99
BHT-430-MM-10
6. On the Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34), press RESULT:

ENG 2.
• A message appears on the IIDS secondary
7. Record the data for the engine No. 2. screen asking for a password to be entered.
20. Release the SEL switch and C/C switch and enter
8. Press the MENU 1 switch. password 2311.
9. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen RESULT:

(Figure 95-32), select 9 – CONFIGURATION using the
DN switch. • The IIDS secondary screen then starts
flashing and displays "HVM INIT" (blue in
10. Record the data that shows on the Configuration color) for about 1 minute and then the screen
screen. should return to normal. If the screen does not
return to normal, advise Product Support
Engineering.
21. Close the two IIDS primary screen circuit
12. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen breakers (CB-E8 and CB-E12).
(Figure 95-32), select 10 – MAST TORQUE
22. Carry out a fuel calibration (paragraph 95-174,
paragraph 95-175, or paragraph 95-175A).
13. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen,
(Figure 95-33), select SET K9 using the DN switch. 23. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL
switch and the TST switch together and hold for 4
14. Press the SEL switch. seconds to enter the LH maintenance screen.
15. Record the mast torque K9. 24. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
(Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN
switch.
16. Press the RTN switch to exit the maintenance
screen.
25. Enter the data recorded in step 5 for engine No.
1.
NOTE
26. On the Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34) press
Following IIDS, "RESET/REBOOT" all
ENG 2.
previous data that was recorded in the
affected IIDS channel, such as ECU faults,
engine exceedances, engine data, engine 27. Enter the data recorded in step 7 for engine No.
history, etc., is deleted. 2.
17. Open the IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8, 28. Press the MENU 1 switch.
18. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL (Figure 95-32), select 9 – CONFIGURATION using the
switch and C/C switch together and hold (as if to DN switch.
access the maintenance screen).
30. Enter the data recorded in step 10 on the
19. While still holding the SEL switch and C/C switch, Configuration screen.
close the two IIDS secondary screen circuit breakers
(CB-E7 and CB-E11). 31. Press the MENU 1 switch.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
32. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen, 4. Do an operational check of the IIDS (paragraph
(Figure 95-32) select 10 – MAST TORQUE 95-110).
5. Verify for the correct time and date (paragraph
33. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen, 95-197 and paragraph 95-198).
(Figure 95-33) select SET K9 using the DN switch.
95-108. IIDS — Installation (After Replacement)
35. Enter the mast torque K9, recorded in step 15. NOTE
36. Press the RTN switch to exit the maintenance IIDS 430-375-001-105,-109, or -111 can be
screen. replaced with IIDS 430-375-001-113 or
refurbished/repaired IIDS
RESULT: 430-375-001-105,-109, or -111.
1. Put the IIDS unit in position on its mounting tray.

• The IIDS secondary screen should display the
normal IIDS display.
2. Connect the four electrical connectors.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
3. Slide the IIDS unit forward carefully and secure in
• If the IIDS secondary screen does not display position around the perimeter with the screws.
the normal IIDS display after resetting, replace
the IIDS. 4. Do an operational check of the IIDS unit
(paragraph 95-110).
95-106. IIDS — Removal
5. Verify for the correct time and date (paragraph
1. Do the following:
95-197 and paragraph 95-198).
• For P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113,
access the Fuel Calibration screens and note 6. Do a fuel calibration (paragraph 95-174 for P/N
the reference ratios for both full and empty 430-375-001-105 and -109, or paragraph 95-175A for
calibration. P/N 430-375-001-107 and -111).
• For P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109, access the 7. Do a mast torque calibration (paragraph 95-137)
Mast Torque Calibration screen and note the K9 or access the Mast Torque Calibration screen and insert
constant value before disconnecting IIDS. K9 from the previous IIDS unit.
2. Remove the screws around the perimeter of the 8. Access the Parameter Menu screen in the
IIDS unit. maintenance pages and set up parameters as required
(paragraph 95-134).
3. Slide the IIDS unit aft, carefully, and disconnect the
four electrical connectors.
9. Access the Configuration Menu screen in the
maintenance pages and set up parameters as required
4. Remove the IIDS unit from the helicopter.
(paragraph 95-136).
95-107. IIDS — Installation (After Removal for
Access to the Rear of Instrument Panel) 10. Update the Engine Data screens in the
maintenance pages (paragraph 95-113).
1. Put the IIDS unit in position on its mounting tray.
11. Clear any Engine-ECU Faults, Engine
2. Connect the four electrical connectors. Exceedances, IIDS Faults, and the Engine History Page
stored in the IIDS Non-Volatile Memory (paragraph
3. Slide the IIDS unit forward carefully and secure in 95-119, paragraph 95-125, paragraph 95-129, and
position around the perimeter with the screws. paragraph 95-133).
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-109. IIDS DISPLAY UNIT SCREEN — CLEANING RESULT:
• The right side display comes on.

CAUTION CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the right display does not come on, is 28

D O N O T S P R AY A N Y C L E A N I N G
VDC at 1A1P2 pin 1 and pin 3?; If yes replace
SOLUTION, SOLVENT, OR FLUID OF
IIDS, and if no, replace circuit breaker
A N Y K I N D D I R E C T LY O N T HE I ID S
(CB-E8) or repair wiring between CB-E8 and
DISPLAY UNIT SCREEN OR ANYWHERE
1A1P1 pin 1 and pin 3.
ON THE FACE OF THE UNIT. THE SPRAY
FL UID S OR MOI S TURE CA N GO I N
3. Close IIDS power supply No. 2 circuit breaker
BETWEEN THE INNER AND OUTER
(CB-E12).
SCREENS AND CAUSE EXT ENSIVE
DAMAGE TO THE UNIT.
4. Open circuit breaker (CB-E8).
1. Apply a mild glass cleaning solution to a soft
lint-free cloth or tissue. RESULT:
2. Use extreme care and remove any dirt, dust or • The right side display stays on.
contaminant on the display unit screen. Do not put
pressure on the screen. If necessary, repeat the CORRECTIVE ACTION:
application of the cleaning solution over the same
area. Do not touch any other part of the front surface • If the right display does not stay on, is 28 VDC
of the display unit with the cleaning cloth or tissue. at 1A1P2 pin 1 and pin 3? If yes, replace IIDS,
and if no, replace circuit breaker (CB-E12) or
repair wiring between circuit breaker (CB-E12)
3. Let the surface dry. Use a clean, dry lint-free cloth
and the 1A1P2 pin 1 and pin 3.
to dry the screen of any streaks or dampness.
95-110. IIDS DISPLAY UNIT — OPERATIONAL
CHECK RESULT:
• The right side display goes off.

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
DO NOT OPERATE THE IIDS IF THE BUS • If the right display stays on, replace circuit
V O LTA G E I S L E S S T H A N 2 0 V D C breaker (CB-E12).
OPERATION. 6. Close IIDS power supply No. 1 circuit-breaker
(CB-E7).
NOTE
RESULT:
maintenance procedures to prevent battery • The left side display comes on.
depletion.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Open the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7,
CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12). • If the left display does not come on, is 28 VDC
at 1A1P2 pin 3; if yes replace IIDS, and if no,
2. Close IIDS power supply No. 2 circuit breaker replace circuit breaker (CB-E7) or repair
(CB-E8). wiring between CB-E7 and 1A1P2 pin 3.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
7. Close IIDS power No. 1 circuit breaker (CB-E11). CORRECTIVE ACTION:
8. Open circuit breaker (CB-E7). • If the left IIDS maintenance screen does not
come on, replace IIDS.
RESULT:
13. Press the RTN switch, below the IIDS secondary
screen.
• The left side display stays on.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: RESULT:
• If the left display goes off, is 28 VDC at 1A1P1 • The IIDS secondary screen (left display) is on.
pin 2 and 1A1P2 pin 5? If yes, replace IIDS,
and if no, replace circuit breaker (CB-E12) or CORRECTIVE ACTION:
repair wiring between circuit breaker (CB-E12)
and the 1A1P1 pin 2 and 1A1P2 pin 5. • If the lIDS screen does not come on, replace
IIDS.
14. Download any recorded faults from the IIDS faults
screen (paragraph 95-111).
RESULT:
• The left display goes off. 95-111. IIDS MAINTENANCE FORMATS
CORRECTIVE ACTION: The IIDS Maintenance Functions screen

(Figure 95-32) can be shown in either the LH or RH
• If the left display stays on, replace circuit screens. To access the left maintenance screen, press
breaker (CB-E11). simultaneously the SEL and C/C soft keys below the
left screen (4 seconds for P/N 430-375-001-105 and
-109, or 1 second for P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and
10. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7,
-113) to enter the maintenance mode. To access the
CB-E8, CB-E11 and CB-E12).
right maintenance screen, press simultaneously the
SEL and TST soft keys below the right screen for 4
11. Use the IIDS SCROLL switch (1S82), on the pilot seconds. When in the maintenance screens the IIDS
collective stick. keys are used to access or enter maintenance
information. The function of the key is displayed on the
RESULT: bottom of the screen.
• The IIDS secondary screen (left display) Legends for each IIDS function key are defined in
scrolls to page 2. Table 95-4.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Table 95-4. IIDS Function Key Legends
• If the IIDS secondary screen (left display)
does not scroll to page 2, with the IIDS LEGEND DESCRIPTION
SCROLL switch pushed, is continuity between
1A1P2 pin 8 and ground? If yes, replace IIDS RTN Returns to the primary/
and if no, replace 1S82 or repair wiring secondary display
between 1A1P2 pin 8 and ground.
UP Moves the cursor up one level
12. Below the IIDS secondary screen (left display), DOWN Moves the cursor down one
press the SEL switch and C/C switch together and level
hold for 4 seconds.
SEL Selects the currently
• The left IIDS maintenance screen is on. highlighted option
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Table 95-4. IIDS Function Key Legends • Fuel calibration (Figure 95-41, Figure 95-42
and Figure 95-43)
LEGEND DESCRIPTION
• Configuration (Figure 95-44)
MENU X Displays the
previously-displayed menu • Mast torque calibration (Figure 95-45)
ENG 1/ENG 2 Selects parameters for the
displayed engine Access to engine data, IIDS revision faults, parameter
setup, fuel calibration, configuration, and mast torque
P/A Executes the Power calibration screens is inhibited during flight. These
Assurance function screens are shaded in grey during flight. A weight on
wheels (WOW) or weight on skid (WOS) switch is
ACCEPT Stores the selected used to control the inhibit function.
calibration data
NEXT FIELD Moves the cursor to the next As an aid to maintenance personnel, a personal
field (-107, -111, and -113 computer may be used to interface with the IIDS to
only) download or upload information or data that is stored
in the IIDS maintenance pages, as well as allowing the
NEXT DIGIT Moves selection of the digit or IIDS non-volatile memory to be cleared.
operator (+ or -)
The following maintenance pages may be
+1 Increments the selected digit
downloaded:
by one or toggles the operator
between + to - (-107,-111, and
• ECU-Engine Fault
-113 only)
AUTO CALC When keys #3 and #4 (LH • Engine Exceedance

screen) or #8 and #9 (RH
screen) are simultaneously • IIDS Fault
pressed, the constant K9 is
automatically calculated • Engine History Log
(-107, -111, and -113 only)
The following maintenance pages may be uploaded:
NOTE
• Engine Data
If a maintenance screen is selected in flight,
the screen opposite will automatically Data transfer uses the RS-232 interface between the
change to composite mode. personal computer and the helicopter maintenance
connector (4J71), mounted on the left side of the
The IIDS maintenance functions are: pedestal.
• Engine data (Figure 95-34) The minimum requirement for a personal computer to
interface with the 430 Maintenance Bus is as follows:
• Power assurance check (Figure 95-35)
• IBM or compatible personal computer with
• ECU-engine faults (Figure 95-36) Intel 80386DX-25 CPU (or equivalent)
• Engine exceedances (Figure 95-37) • 4 MB RAM
• IIDS faults monitoring (Figure 95-38) • 10 MB Hard Disc Space
• Engine history (Figure 95-39) • 3.5 Inch Disc Drive
• Parameter set-up (Figure 95-40) • One Serial Port
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
• One Parallel Port and the Model 430 maintenance software, P/N
430-770-001.
• Microsoft Windows 3.1
Engine data can be uploaded directly into the LH and
To interface the personal computer to the helicopter, RH screens from the personal computer without
a maintenance harness assembly, P/N 430-275-001, having to enter the IIDS maintenance screens, but it is
Figure 95-46, and software, P/N 430-770-001 is advisable to verify on the maintenance screens that
used. the correct information has been uploaded.
View all downloaded information by opening the files
using a word processor. 95-114. Accessing the IIDS Engine Data Screen
95-112. Power Assurance Check Screen

NOTE
A power assurance check screen is available to Use external power during ground
determine if the engines can produce installed maintenance procedures to prevent battery
specification power. The chart shows the maximum depletion.
allowable MGT for a given torque, pressure altitude,
and OAT (Figure 95-35). 1. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL
switch and C/C switch together and hold for 4 seconds
A power assurance check of the selected engine is to enter the LH maintenance screen.
carried out either on the ground or in the hover and is
performed by the pilot using the POWER 2. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
ASSURANCE CHECK maintenance page. When the (Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN
required engine is selected, the power assurance switch.
check is carried out by pressing the P/A key.
The IIDS will perform the calculations for the Basic
Engine Inlet configuration, with a Particle Separator
installed, with Snow Baffles installed, and with a RESULT:
Particle Separator and Snow Baffles installed, and the
results will be displayed on the POWER ASSURANCE • Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34) for engine
CHECK screen. The pilot will then be able to No. 1 is shown.
determine whether the engine has passed or failed the
power assurance check. If the indicated MGT is less 4. Press the ENG 2 switch.
than or equal to the calculated MGT, the engine is
considered to have passed the power assurance RESULT:
check.
• Engine Data screen for engine No. 2 is shown.
95-113. Engine Data
The Engine Data screen (Figure 95-34) allows details switch and TST switch together and hold for 4
of engine No. 1, engine No. 2, ECU No. 1, and ECU seconds to enter the RH maintenance screen.
No. 2 to be stored in the IIDS. The engine details that
can be stored are the Model, Serial Number, 6. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
Manufacturer, and Date of Installation. The ECU (Figure 95-32), select 2 – ENGINE DATA using the DN
details that can be stored are the Part Number, Serial switch.
Number, Software Version and Release Date, and
Date of Installation.
Engine data is entered onto the LH screen and RH
screen independently. The engine data is entered with RESULT:
the aid of the helicopter maintenance connector • Engine Data screen for engine No. 1 is shown.
(4J11), a personal computer, the 430 maintenance
harness assembly, P/N 430-275-001 (Figure 95-46), 8. Press the ENG 2 switch.
95-00-00
Page 110 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: 10. On the RH maintenance screen, press the RTN

switch.
• Engine Data screen for engine No. 2 is shown.
RESULT:
9. On the LH maintenance screen, press the RTN
switch. • The IIDS primary flight screen is shown.
RESULT:
• IIDS secondary flight screen is shown.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 111
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-35. Power Assurance Check Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 112 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-35. Power Assurance Check Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 113
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-36. ECU — Engine Fault Monitor
95-00-00
Page 114 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-37. Engine Exceedances Display (Sheet 1 of 3)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 115
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 116 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 117
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-38. IIDS Faults Monitoring (Sheet 1 of 2)
95-00-00
Page 118 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-38. IIDS Faults Monitoring (Sheet 2 of 2)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 119
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-39. Engine History Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 6)
95-00-00
Page 120 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 121
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 122 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
ENGINE HISTORY
1 -30 MIN OEI

2 -2 MIN OEI
3 -30 SEC OEI
4 -OEI EXCEEDANCE
ENG 1 ENG 2
ENGINE STARTS XXX XXX
ENGINE OPERATING TIME HH:MM HH:MM
FADEC-ECU OPERATING TIME HH:MM HH:MM
NOTE
Display similar to 30 SEC OEI.
430MM_95_0105
Figure 95-39. Engine History Display (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) (Sheet 4 of 6)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
30 MIN OEI
OCCURRENCES
ENG 1 ENG 2
1 -MGT XXXXX XXXXX
430MM_95_0106
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
OEI EXCEEDANCES
OCCURRENCES
ENG 1 ENG 2
1 -MGT XXX XXX
2 -TRQ XXX XXX
430MM 95 0107
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-40. Parameter Set-Up Display (Sheet 1 of 4)
95-00-00
Page 126 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 127
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
Page 128 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 129
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-41. Fuel Calibration Display (Sheet 1 of 3)
95-00-00
Page 130 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-41. Fuel Calibration Display (Sheet 2 of 3)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 131
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-41. Fuel Calibration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 3 of 3)
95-00-00
Page 132 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
LH TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST

OR
LH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST
SELECTED CONFIGURATION: SKID GEAR or WHEEL GEAR (Yellow)
FILL TANK METHOD:

MEAS. QTY YYYY LBS
MANUAL EDIT METHOD:
REF. RATIO: XXXXX
REF. QTY: 0000 LBS
NEXT FIELD
430_MM_95_0108_c01
Figure 95-42. LH Tank Fuel Calibration Page (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
RH TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST

OR
RH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST
SELECTED CONFIGURATION: SKID GEAR or WHEEL GEAR (Yellow)
FILL TANK METHOD:

MEAS. QTY YYYY LBS
MANUAL EDIT METHOD:
REF. RATIO: XXXXX
REF. QTY: 0000 LBS
NEXT FIELD
430_MM_95_0109_c01
Figure 95-43. RH Tank Fuel Calibration Page (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-44. Configuration Display (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 3)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 135
BHT-430-MM-10
7 -LANDING GEAR SKID
SINGLE
430_MM_95_0110_c01
Figure 95-44. Configuration Display (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) (Sheet 2 of 3)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-44. Configuration Display (Sheet 3 of 3)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 137
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-45. Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 1 of 5)
95-00-00
Page 138 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-45. Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) (Sheet 2 of 5)
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 139
BHT-430-MM-10
MAST TORQUE
SET K1: 8.54 SET K5: 8600

SET K2: 6.78 SET K6: 189256
SET K3: -6.23 SET K7: -0.6
SET K4: -9.98 SET K8: 1.0
SET K9: -5370
MEASURED LINKS
430MM_95_0111
Figure 95-45. Mast Torque Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) (Sheet 3 of 5)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
ADJUST K3 CONSTANT
K3: X.XX
MEASURED LINKS
NOTE
1. Constant adjustment menu (typical for all constants except K9).
430MM_95_0112
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
ADJUST K9 CONSTANT
K9: -XXXX
MEASURED LINKS
AUTO CALC
NOTE
1. Constant adjustment menu (K9 only).
430MM_95_0113
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-46. Harness, Maintenance — M430
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 143
BHT-430-MM-10
95-115. Uploading Engine Data to the IIDS 6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen,
select IIDS and then select OK.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the

Communications Port Number used by the personal
computer for data transfer (Usually Communications
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE Port No. 1) and then select OK.
430-275-001 Maintenance
8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select
Harness Assembly
the directory to save data files and then select OK.
430-770-001 Model 430
Maintenance Software 9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu
screen, select ENGINE DATA UPLOAD and then
IBM or compatible select OK.
personal computer with
Intel 80386DX-25 CPU 10. On the Engine Data Upload screen, select
(or equivalent), 4 MB ENGINE No. 1.
RAM, 10 MB hard disc
space, 3.5 inch disc 11. Enter ENGINE No. 1 and FADEC-ECU No. 1
drive, one serial port, data.
one parallel port, and
Microsoft Windows 3.1
12. Select OPTIONS.
operating system.
13. Select Upload Data.
NOTE
14. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness
Upload engine data separately into both
assembly.
the IIDS primary and secondary screens.
Look at the IIDS maintenance screen 15. Select OPTIONS.
a n d v e r i f y E n g i n e D a t a a ft e r e a c h
upload. 16. Select Upload Data.
maintenance to prevent battery 17. On the personal computer Engine Data Upload
depletion. screen, select ENGINE No. 2.
1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to
connector (4J71) on the left side pedestal and the 18. Enter ENGINE No. 2 and FADEC-ECU No. 2
serial port of the personal computer. data.
19. Select OPTIONS.

2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
assembly.
3. On the personal computer (in Microsoft
Windows), open the IIDS MAINTENANCE 21. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. assembly.
4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen, 22. Select OPTIONS.

select OK.
5. On the Aircraft Identification screen, enter the
helicopter identification and select OK.
95-00-00
Page 144 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
24. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all 2. Do one of the following:
screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program.
• (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109): On the IIDS
Maintenance Functions screen
95-116. ECU-Engine Fault Monitor Screen (P/N (Figure 95-32), select 3 – ECU-ENGINE
430-375-001-105 and -109) / ECU-Engine FAULTS using the DN switch.
System Status Screen (P/N
430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) • (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113): On
the IIDS Data Pages screen (Figure 95-32),
The ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen is available on select 3 – ECU-ENGINE SYSTEM STATUS
the IIDS primary and secondary screens. using the DN switch.
Each screen shows ECU-Engine faults read from the 3. Press the SEL switch.
ECU No. 1 and No. 2. Fault data is shown on the
screen as a fault code with the date of occurrence.
RESULT:
Fault data is transferred from the ECU to the IIDS
using the Arinc 429 data bus and is then stored in the • ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen for engine
Non-Volatile Memory of the IIDS. The fault screen will No. 1 is shown.
show an occurrence by engine in a chronological order
with the most recent fault at the top of the list. If the 4. Press the ENG 2 switch.
same fault occurs on the same date, only one fault will
be recorded on the fault screen. If the fault occurs on RESULT:
consecutive days, it will show on the fault screen for
each day until the fault is rectified. • ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen for engine
No. 2 is shown.
The ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen can be
downloaded from either or both IIDS primary and 5. Press the SEL switch and TST switch, below the
secondary screens to a personal computer, using the IIDS primary screen, together, and hold for 4 seconds,
Model 430 maintenance harness assembly, P/N to enter the RH maintenance screen.
430-275-001 (Figure 95-46), and the Model 430
maintenance software, P/N 430-770-001. 6. Do one of the following:
After downloading the IIDS fault data to a personal • (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109): On the IIDS
computer, the fault information can be cleared from the Maintenance Functions screen
Non-Volatile Memory of the IIDS using a personal (Figure 95-32), select 3 – ECU-ENGINE
computer, the Model 430 maintenance harness FAULTS using the DN switch.
assembly P/N 430-275-001 (Figure 95-46), and the
Model 430 maintenance software, P/N 430-770-001. • (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113): On
the IIDS Data Pages screen (Figure 95-32)
95-117. Accessing IIDS ECU-Engine Fault Monitor select 3 – ECU-ENGINE SYSTEM STATUS
Screen (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109) / using the DN switch.
ECU-Engine System Status Screen (P/N
430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) 7. Press the SEL switch.
NOTE RESULT:
maintenance procedures to prevent battery • ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen for engine
depletion. No. 1 is shown.
1. Press the SEL switch and C/C switch, below the 8. Press the ENG 2 switch.
IIDS secondary screen, together, and hold for 4
seconds, to enter the LH maintenance screen.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: 1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to

the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
• ECU-Engine Fault Monitor screen for engine pedestal, and to the personal computer.
No. 2 is shown.
9. On the LH maintenance screen, press the RTN assembly.
switch.
RESULT: Windows), open the IIDS MAINTENANCE
• IIDS secondary screen is shown.
4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen
10. On the RH maintenance screen, press the RTN
and select OK.
switch.

RESULT:
• IIDS primary screen is shown.
6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen,
95-118. Downloading the ECU-Engine Fault select IIDS and then select OK.
Monitor Screen
7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the
NOTE computer for data transfer (Usually Communications
ECU-Engine Faults data may be Port No. 1) and then select OK.
downloaded from either or both the IIDS
primary and secondary screens. 8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select
9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu
depletion.
screen, select ECU-Engine Fault Monitor and then
select OK.
10. On the IIDS Data Download screen, select
engine No. 1.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
11. Select OPTIONS.
Harnes s Assembly
12. Select Download Data.
430-770-001 Model 430
Maintenance Software RESULT:
IBM or compatible • A download screen appears and the file name

personal computer with of the download is entered. At the end of the
Intel 80386DX-25 CPU download, the No. 1 ECU-Engine Fault data
(or equivalent), 4 MB from the primary screen will show on the
RAM, 10 MB hard disc personal computer screen.
space, 3.5 inch disc
drive, one serial port, 13. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness
one parallel port, and assembly.
operating system.
14. Select OPTIONS.
95-00-00
Page 146 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10

NOTE
RESULT: ECU-Engine Fault data may be cleared
from either or both the IIDS primary and
• A download screen appears and the file name secondary screens’ Non-Volatile Memory.
of the download is entered. At the end of the The ECU-Engine Fault data must be
download, the No. 1 ECU-Engine data from downloaded to a personal computer before
the secondary screen will show on the the data can be cleared from NVM.
personal computer screen.
NOTE
16. On the personal computer IIDS Data Download
screen, select ENGINE No. 2. Use external power during ground
17. Select OPTIONS. depletion.

RESULT:
• A download screen appears and the file name NUMBER NOMENCLATURE

of the download is entered. At the end of the
download, the No. 2 ECU-Engine Fault data 430-275-001 Maintenance
from the secondary screen will show on the Harness Assembly
430-770-001 Model 430
19. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness Maintenance Software
assembly.
IBM or compatible
20. Select OPTIONS. personal computer with
Intel 80386DX-25 CPU
21. Select Download Data. (or equivalent), 4 MB
RESULT:
drive, one serial port,
• A download screen appears and the file name
operating system.
download, the No. 2 ECU-Engine Fault data
from the primary screen will show on the
personal computer screen. 1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to
22. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all pedestal and to the serial port of the personal
screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE computer.
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. (You can see data
when you open the data file using the word processor 2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
software.) assembly.
95-119. Clearing ECU-Engine Fault IIDS

Non-Volatile Memory
Windows), open the IIDS MAINTENANCE
NOTE
The paragraph 95-118, Downloading the
ECU-Engine Fault Monitor Screen, should
be done before doing the following steps.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen, the W/C/A window after both engines are started (NG
select OK. above 50%), but reappears if a new exceedance is
recorded or after any subsequent application of
5. On the Aircraft Identification screen, enter the electrical power.
The Engine Exceedances screen shows any
6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen, exceedance occurrences. The parameter which
select IIDS and then select OK. shows the exceedance can then be selected and the
screen (Figure 95-37) shows the peak value, the
duration, and the date of the exceedance is displayed.
The torque and MGT screen also shows the highest
peak value recorded by the ECU. Exceedance data
computer for data transfer (usually Communications
and time may vary slightly between the primary and
Port No. 1) and then select OK.
secondary screens due to the fact that both IIDS
channels process data independently.
The Engine Exceedances screen can be downloaded
from either or both the IIDS primary and secondary
9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu screens to a personal computer, using the Model 430
screen, select ECU-Engine Fault Monitor and then maintenance harness assembly P/N 430-275-001
select OK. (Figure 95-46) and the Model 430 maintenance
software P/N 430-770-001.
OPTIONS. 95-121. Exceedances Monitored on P/N
430-375-001-105 and -109 IIDS Displays
11. Select Clear Memory.
The Engine Exceedances screen shows all
12. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness exceedance of the following parameters:
assembly.
• NG — Peak values above 106%, for a duration
13. Select OPTIONS. of 100 milliseconds maximum, are recorded.
14. Select Clear Memory. • NP — Peak values above 118%, for a duration
of 100 milliseconds maximum, are recorded.
15. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all
screens to close the IDS MAINTENANCE • QE (engine torque) — Peak values above
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. 102.5%, for a duration of 100 milliseconds
maximum, are recorded.
95-120. Engine Exceedances Screen
• MGT (engines running) — Peak values above
The Engine Exceedances screen is available on the 798°C, for a duration of 100 milliseconds
IIDS primary and secondary screens (Figure 95-37). maximum.
For P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 IIDS • MGT (engine start) — Peak values above
systems, an EXCEED caution message displays on 825°C, for a duration of 100 milliseconds
the W/C/A window whenever an exceedance is maximum.
recorded. This message is latched until power is
turned off. • NR — Peak values above 105.5%, with no
minimum duration, are recorded.
As long as All Engine Operative (AEO) exceedances
remain in the NVM of the IIDS, the EXCEED caution • QM (mast torque) — Peak values above
message displays on the W/C/A window at 100.5%, with no minimum duration, are
subsequent power-ups. The caution disappears from recorded.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-122. Exceedances Monitored on P/N

NOTE
430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 IIDS
Displays Exceedance data and time may vary
slightly between the primary and secondary
The Engine Exceedances screen shows all screens due to the fact that both IIDS
exceedance of the following parameters: channels are processing data
independently.
• NG — Peak values between 105 and 106%, if
condition exists for more than 10 seconds (10 1. Press the SEL switch and C/C switch, below the
seconds will be accounted for if exceeded), or IIDS screen, together, and hold for 4 seconds, to enter
immediately when above 106%. the LH maintenance screen.
• NP — Peak values between 106.3 and 118%, 2. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
if condition exists for more than 15 seconds (Figure 95-32), select 4 — ENGINE EXCEEDANCE
(15 seconds will be accounted for if using the DN switch.
exceeded), or immediately when above 118%.
• QE (engine torque) — Peak values and date
event duration when torque is above or equal RESULT:
to 80.2% for more than 300 seconds (300
seconds will be accounted for if exceeded), or
• The Engine Exceedances screen is shown.
immediately when above 92.8%.
4. On the Engine Exceedances screen, select the
• MGT (engines running) — Peak values above
parameter showing an occurrence, using the UP or
726.7°C for more than 300 seconds (300
DOWN switch, and press SEL switch.
seconds shall be accounted for if exceeded)
(continuous), or peak values above 779.4°C
for 12 seconds (continuous) (12 seconds shall RESULT:
be accounted for if exceeded), or immediately
when above 905.5°. • The engine No. 1 EXCEEDANCES screen
shows.
• MGT (engine start) — Peak values above
843°C for more than 10 seconds (continuous) 5. Press the ENG 2 switch.
(10 seconds shall be accounted for if
exceeded), or immediately when above RESULT:
926.7°. These MGT values are only valid
while the associated START advisory is • The engine No. 2 EXCEEDANCES screen
displayed on the IIDS screen. shows.
• QM (mast torque) (All Engine Operative (AEO) 6. To return to the Engine Exceedances screen,
mode) — Peak values and data event press MENU 2. This will allow the selection of another
duration when mast torque is above 100.5% parameter (step 4).
for 16 seconds (16 seconds will be accounted
for if exceeded), or immediately when above
105%. 7. Press the SEL switch and TST switch, below the
IIDS primary screen, together, and hold for 4 seconds,
to enter the RH maintenance screen.
95-123. Accessing the Engine Exceedance Screen
8. On the IIDS Engine Exceedances screen,

NOTE (Figure 95-32) select 4 — ENGINE EXCEEDANCE
Use external power during ground using the DN switch.
depletion. 9. Press the SEL switch.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT:
NOTE
• The Engine Exceedances screen is shown. Use external power during ground
10. On the Engine Exceedances screen, select the depletion.
parameter showing an occurrence, using the UP or
DOWN switch, and press the SEL switch.
RESULT:
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
• The engine No. 1 Exceedances screen
shows. 430-275-001 Maintenance
Harness Assembly
11. Press ENG 2.
430-770-001 Model 430
Maintenance Software
RESULT:
IBM or compatible
• The engine No. 2 Exceedances screen personal computer with
shows. Intel 80386DX-25 CPU
(or equivalent), 4 MB
12. To return to the Engine Exceedances screen, RAM, 10 MB hard disc
press MENU 2. This allows the selection of another space, 3.5 inch disc
parameter (step 10). drive, one serial port,
13. On the LH maintenance screen, press the RTN
operating system.
switch.
RESULT: 1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to

the connector (4J71) on the left side pedestal and the
serial port of the personal computer.
• IIDS secondary flight screen is shown.
14. On the RH maintenance screen, press the RTN 2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
switch. assembly.

RESULT:
• IIDS primary flight screen is shown.
4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen,
95-124. Downloading the IIDS Engine Exceedance
select OK.
Screen

NOTE helicopter identification and select OK.
Engine exceedance data may be
downloaded from either or both the IIDS 6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen,
primary and secondary screens. select IIDS and then select OK.
Exceedance data and time may vary
slightly between the primary and secondary 7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the
screens, due the fact that both IIDS Communications Port Number used by the personal
channels are processing data computer for data transfer (Usually Communications
independently. Port No. 1) and then select OK.
95-00-00
Page 150 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select 19. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
the directory to save data files and then select OK. assembly.

20. Select OPTIONS.
screen, select Engine Exceedances and then select
OK.
ENGINE No. 1.
RESULT:
11. Select OPTIONS.
12. Select Download Data. of the download is entered. At the end of the
download, the engine No. 2 exceedance data
RESULT: from the primary screen will show on the
of the download is entered. At the end of the 22. On the personal computer, select EXIT on the
download, the No. 1 ECU-Engine Fault data screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE
from the primary screen will show on the
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. (The data may be
viewed by opening the data file using a word
13. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness processor).
assembly.
95-125. Clearing Engine Exceedance Data IIDS
14. Select OPTIONS. Non-Volatile Memory

NOTE
RESULT: Engine exceedance data may be cleared
from either or both of the IIDS primary and
• A download screen appears and the file name secondary screens’ Non-Volatile Memory.
The engine exceedance data must be
downloaded to a personal computer before
from the secondary screen will show on the
personal computer screen. the data can be cleared from NVM.

NOTE
screen, select ENGINE No. 2.
17. Select OPTIONS. maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
RESULT: SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

of the download is entered. At the end of the NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
from the secondary screen will show on the
Harness Assembly
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 151
BHT-430-MM-10
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED (Cont) 10. On the IIDS Data Download screen, select
OPTIONS.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
430-770-001 Model 430
Maintenance Software 12. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness
assembly.
IBM or compatible
personal computer with 13. Select OPTIONS.
(or equivalent), 4 MB
RAM, 10 MB hard disc 14. Select Clear Memory.
drive, one serial port, 15. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all
one parallel port, and screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE
Microsoft Windows 3.1 SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program.
operating system.
95-126. IIDS Revision-Faults Monitor Screen
the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center The IIDS Revision-Faults Monitor screen
pedestal and to the serial port of the personal (Figure 95-38) is available on the IIDS primary and
computer. secondary screens.
2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness The IIDS Revision-Faults Monitor screen shows the
assembly. revision history and a record of any IIDS board level
faults. Fault data is shown on the screen as a fault
code with the date of occurrence. The fault data
3. On the personal computer (in Microsoft shown on the RH screen is for the RH channel of the
Windows), open the IIDS MAINTENANCE IIDS and the Fault data shown on the LH screen is for
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. the LH channel of the IIDS.
4. On Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen, Fault data is stored in the Non-Volatile Memory of the
select OK. IIDS and the fault screen will show an occurrence by
board and in a chronological order with the most
recent fault at the top of the list. If the same fault
occurs on the same date, only one fault will be
recorded on the fault screen. If the fault occurs on
consecutive days, it will show on the fault screen for
6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen, each day, until the fault is rectified.
The IIDS Revision-Faults screen can be downloaded
7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the from both the IIDS primary and secondary screens to
Communications Port Number used by the personal a personal computer, using the Model 430
computer for data transfer (Usually Communications maintenance harness assembly P/N 430-275-001,
Port No. 1) and then select OK. and the Model 430 maintenance software P/N
430-770-001.
8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select After downloading the IIDS Revision-Faults to a
the directory to save data files and then select OK. personal computer, the faults can be cleared from the
Non-Volatile Memory of the IIDS using a personal
9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu computer, the Model 430 maintenance harness
screen, select Engine Exceedance and then select assembly P/N 430-275-001, and the Model 430
OK. maintenance software P/N 430-770-001.
95-00-00
Page 152 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-127. Accessing the IIDS Revision-Faults Screen 9. On the LH maintenance screen press RTN
switch.
NOTE
RESULT:
• The IIDS secondary flight screen is shown.
depletion.
Each IIDS screen records its own faults, 10. On the RH maintenance screen press the RTN
and therefore faults on one channel will not switch.
be recorded on the cross-side channel.
RESULT:
1. Press the SEL switch and C/C switch, below the
IIDS secondary screen, together, and hold for 4
• The IIDS primary flight screen is shown.
seconds, to enter the LH maintenance screen.
95-128. Downloading the IIDS Faults Screen

(Figure 95-32), select 5 – IIDS REVISION-FAULTS
using the DN switch. NOTE
IIDS Faults Data may be downloaded from
3. Press the SEL switch. both of the IIDS primary and secondary
screens.
RESULT:
Each IIDS screen records its own faults,
• The Revision History screen is shown. and therefore faults on one channel will not
be recorded on the cross-side channel.
4. Press the DN switch.
RESULT: maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
• The IIDS Faults screen is shown.
5. Press the SEL switch and TST switch, below the SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
IIDS primary screen, together, and hold for 4 seconds,
to enter the RH maintenance screen.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
6. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen 430-275-001 Maintenance

(Figure 95-32), select 5 – IIDS REVISION-FAULTS Harness Assembly
using the DN switch.
430-770-001 Model 430
7. Press the SEL switch. Maintenance Software
IBM or compatible
RESULT: personal computer with
• The Revision History screen is shown. (or equivalent), 4 MB
8. Press the DN switch. space, 3.5 inch disc
RESULT: one parallel port, and
operating system.
• IIDS Faults screen is shown.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 153
BHT-430-MM-10
1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to RESULT:

the connector (4J71) on the left side of the centre
pedestal and to the personal computer. • A download screen appears and the file name
2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness download, the IIDS Fault data from the
assembly. secondary screen will show on the personal
computer screen.
15. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all
viewed by opening the data file in a word processor).
select OK.
95-129. Clearing IIDS Faults Data from the IIDS
Non-Volatile Memory
NOTE
6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen, IIDS faults data may be cleared from either
select IIDS and then select OK. or both of the IIDS primary and secondary
screens’ Non-Volatile Memory. The engine
7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the exceedance data must be downloaded to a
communications port number used by the personal personal computer before the data can be
computer for data transfer (usually communications cleared from NVM.
port No. 1) and then select OK.
8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select depletion.
the directory to save data files, and then select OK.
9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED

screen, select IIDS Fault and then select OK.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
OPTIONS. 430-275-001 Maintenance
Harness Assembly
430-770-001 Model 430
RESULT:
IBM or compatible
• A download screen appears and the file name personal computer with
of the download is entered. At the end of the Intel 80386DX-25 CPU
download, the IIDS Fault data from the (or equivalent), 4 MB
primary screen will show on the personal RAM, 10 MB hard disc
computer screen. space, 3.5 inch disc
12. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness one parallel port, and
assembly. Microsoft Windows 3.1
operating system.
13. Select OPTIONS.
14. Select Download Data. the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
95-00-00
Page 154 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
pedestal and to the serial port of the personal P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113), the total
computer. duration, and the date of occurrence of the OEI event
for engine No. 1 and No. 2. The engine history screen
2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness will also show the number of starts and the engine
assembly. operating time for engine No. 1 and No. 2, and the
FADEC-ECU operating time for ECU No. 1 and No. 2.
Windows), open the IIDS MAINTENANCE For IIDS P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. systems only, MGT and torque OEI events are
recorded independently for each 30 second, 2 minute,
and 30 minute category.
select OK. OEI events are detected and recorded by the IIDS in
its Non-Volatile Memory. The OEI event screen will
5. On the Aircraft Identification screen, enter the show an occurrence by engine in a chronological order
helicopter identification and select OK. with the most recent event at the top of the list. The
total OEI time for ECU No. 1 and No. 2 is also shown
6. On the communications port screen, enter the through the Arinc 429 data bus.
communications port number used by the personal
computer for data transfer (usually communications The engine history screen will show the number of
port no. 1) and then select OK. starts and the engine operating time for engine No. 1
and No. 2, and the FADEC-ECU operating time for
7. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select ECU No. 1 and No. 2. The 30 second, 2 minute, and
the directory to save data files and then select OK. 30 minute OEI events can be selected from the Engine
History screen. The OEI event parameter can then be
selected and the screen (Figure 95-47 or Figure 95-48
for P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 and P/N
screen, select IIDS Faults and then select OK.
430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 respectively)
showing the total OEI time and the MGT and TRQ
9. On the IIDS Data Download screen, select occurrences for engine No. 1 and No. 2 will be
OPTIONS. displayed. The individual parameter can then be
selected and the screen showing the peak value, the
10. Select Clear Memory. date and the duration recorded by the ECU is
displayed. The OEI events always provide both MGT
11. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness and Torque data, regardless of the fact that only one
assembly. parameter has operated in the OEI range.
12. Select OPTIONS. The engine history screen can be downloaded from
either or both the IIDS primary and secondary screens
to a personal computer, using the Model 430
maintenance harness assembly, P/N 430-275-001,
and Model 430 maintenance software, P/N
14. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all 430-770-001.
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. After downloading the engine history to a personal
computer, the data can be cleared from the
95-130. Engine History Screen Non-Volatile Memory of the IIDS using a personal
computer, the Model 430 maintenance harness
The Engine History screen (Figure 95-39) is available assembly P/N 430-275-001 and the Model 430
on the IIDS primary and secondary screens. maintenance software P/N 430-770-001.
The engine history screen will show all OEI events (30 Figure 95-49 shows how the IIDS (P/N
seconds and 2 minutes for P/N 430-375-001-105 and 430-375-001-105 and -109 only) records MGT OEI
-109) and (30 seconds, 2 minutes, and 30 minutes for events for each category of OEI exeedances.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-47. OEI Event Profile (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109)
95-00-00
Page 156 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-48. OEI Event Profile (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-49. Torque OEI Usage (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 only)
95-00-00
Page 158 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-50 shows how the IIDS (P/N 8. To return to the Engine History screen, press
430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 only) records torque MENU 2. This will allow the selection of another
OEI events for each category of OEI exeedances. parameter (step 4).
95-131. Accessing the Engine History Maintenance 9. Below the IIDS primary screen, press the SEL
Screen switch and TST switch together and hold for 4
seconds to enter the RH maintenance screen.
NOTE
Use external power during ground (Figure 95-32), select 6 – ENGINE HISTORY using
maintenance procedures to prevent battery the DN switch.
depletion.
1. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL 11. Press the SEL switch.
to enter the LH maintenance screen. RESULT:
2. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen, • The Engine History screen is shown.
(Figure 95-32) select 6 – ENGINE HISTORY using the
DN switch. 12. On the Engine History screen, select the 1-2 MIN
OEI or the 2-30 SEC OEI parameter using the UP or
3. Press the SEL switch. DN switch and press the SEL switch.
RESULT: RESULT:
• The Engine History screen is shown.
• The 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI screen
4. On the Engine History screen, select the 1-2 MIN shows.
OEI or the 2-30 SEC OEI parameter using the UP or
DOWN switch and press the SEL switch. 13. On the 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI screen,
select the 1 -MGT or the 2 - TRQ parameter using the
RESULT: UP or DOWN switch and press the SEL switch.
• The 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI screen
shows. RESULT:
5. On the 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI screen, • The engine No. 1 MGT or TRQ OEI screen
select the 1 -MGT or the 2 - TRQ parameter, using the shows.
UP or DOWN switch, and press the SEL switch.
14. Press ENG 2.
RESULT:
• The engine No. 1 MGT or TRQ OEI screen RESULT:
shows.
• The engine No. 2 MGT or TRQ OEI screen
6. Press ENG 2. shows.
RESULT: 15. To return to the 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI

• The engine No. 2 MGT or TRQ OEI screen screen, press MENU 3. This will allow the selection of
shows. another parameter (step 13).
7. To return to the 2 MIN OEI or the 30 SEC OEI 16. To return to the Engine History screen, press
screen, press MENU 3. This will allow the selection of MENU 2. This will allow the selection of another
another parameter (step 5). parameter (step 12).
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
, -111, and -113).
430_MM_95_0101_c01
Figure 95-50. MGT OEI Usage (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 only)
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
17. On the LH maintenance screen, press the RTN 2. Select IIDS PRI on the maintenance harness
switch. assembly.
RESULT: 3. On the personal computer (in Microsoft

• The IIDS secondary flight screen is shown. SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program.
18. On the RH maintenance screen, press the RTN 4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen,
switch. select OK.
RESULT:
• The IIDS primary flight screen is shown.
95-132. Downloading the Engine History Screen 6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen,
NOTE
ECU-Engine Faults Data may be communications port number used by the personal
downloaded from either or both the IIDS computer for data transfer (usually communications
primary and secondary screens. port No. 1) and then select OK.

the directory to save the data files and then select OK.
depletion.

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED screen, select Engine History Log and then select OK.

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE engine No. 1.
Harnes s Assembly 11. Select OPTIONS.
430-770-001 Model 430

IBM or compatible RESULT:

personal computer with
Intel 80386DX-25 CPU • A download screen appears and the file name
(or equivalent), 4 MB of the download is entered. At the end of the
RAM, 10 MB hard disc download, the engine No. 1 history data from
space, 3.5 inch disc the primary screen will show on the personal
drive, one serial port, computer screen.
operating system. 13. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness
assembly.

14. Select OPTIONS.
pedestal and to the serial port of the personal
computer. 15. Select Download Data.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 161
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: downloaded to a personal computer before

the data can be cleared from NVM.
of the download is entered. At the end of the NOTE
download, the engine No. 1 history data from
the secondary screen will show on the Use external power during ground
personal computer screen. maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
screen, select ENGINE No. 2. 1. Connect the maintenance harness assembly to
pedestal and to the serial port of the personal
17. Select OPTIONS.
computer.
assembly.
RESULT:
the secondary screen will show on the
personal computer screen. 4. On the Model 430 Maintenance Terminal screen,
select OK.
assembly. 5. On the Aircraft Identification screen, enter the
20. Select OPTIONS.
6. On the Model 430 Maintenance Menu screen,
21. Select Download Data. select IIDS and then select OK.
RESULT: 7. On the Communications Port screen, enter the

communications port number used by the personal
• A download screen appears and the file name computer for data transfer (usually communications
of the download is entered. At the end of the port No. 1) and then select OK.
the primary screen will show on the personal 8. On the Default Directory Selection screen, select
computer screen. the directory to save data files and then select OK.
22. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all 9. On the Model 430 IIDS Maintenance Menu
screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE screen, select Engine History Log and then select OK.
viewed by opening the data file in a word processor 10. On the IIDS Data Download screen, select
software). OPTIONS.
95-133. Clearing Engine History Data IIDS

Non-Volatile Memory
12. Select IIDS SEC on the maintenance harness
NOTE assembly.
Engine history data may be cleared from
either or both the IIDS primary and 13. Select OPTIONS.
secondary screens Non-Volatile Memory.
The engine history data must be 14. Select Clear Memory.
95-00-00
Page 162 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
15. On the personal computer, select EXIT on all • Low rotor RPM audio output level adjustment
screens to close the IIDS MAINTENANCE to allow audio output to be adjusted to a
SOFTWARE (M430 IIDS) program. comfortable listening level. The audio can be
adjusted to one of 15 levels with 15 being the
highest.
95-134. Parameter Set-Up
• AFCS selection to allow the display of single
The IIDS allows time and date adjustment from the or dual AFCS warning/caution annunciators.
bezel soft keys through this menu. The Outside Air
Temperature (OAT) units (°C or °F), the fuel quantity, • Landing gear selection to allow skids or
and the fuel flow units (LBS or kg/H) are also wheels to be selected.
selectable from this menu (Figure 95-40).
To access the configuration display, the maintenance
95-135. Fuel Calibration Display interlock connector must be installed.
The fuel calibration function allows zero adjustment 95-137. Mast Torque Calibration
and full-scale adjustment of the fuel quantity indication
when set. The adjustment is done separately for each The mast torque calibration (Figure 95-45) function
fuel tank (Figure 95-42 and Figure 95-43). To access allows the adjustment of the mast torque constants K1
the fuel calibration display, the maintenance interlock to K9. To access the mast torque calibration display,
connector must be installed. the maintenance interlock connector must be installed.
95-136. Configuration Display 95-138. ENGINE TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEMS
The configuration display (Figure 95-44) allows the The engine torque (Q) is displayed on the IIDS and
selection of the following: consists of two vertical scales side by side with the
rotor torque (MQ) in the middle, between each engine
torque (Q). The indication also displays as a digital
• Mast torque alternate input selection. This reading directly above the vertical scales.
display should be set at DISABLED at all
times.
The engine torque indicating system (refer to
Figure 95-51) consists of:
• Inverter No. 2 display selection to allow the
display of No. 2 inverter voltmeter and No. 2 • A torque transducer mounted on engine No. 1
inverter caution annunciations when No. 2 and No. 2
inverter is installed.
• A torque transducer mounted on the rear of
• Auxiliary fuel quantity display selection to engine No. 1 and No. 2 firewalls
allow the display of auxiliary fuel quantity in a
digital format on the secondary flight display • FADEC-ECU 1 and 2
(Figure 95-28). When the aux fuel quantity is
enabled, the aux fuel contents are added to
• A pilot torque indication displayed on the IIDS
the main fuel quantity and displayed on the primary flight screen
totalize display.
In normal operation, torque information is supplied

• Fuel flow display selection to allow the display from the engine-mounted torque transducers to the
of fuel flow in a digital format when a fuel flow FADEC ECU and then by the ARINC 429 data bus to
system is installed. the IIDS.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 163
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-51. Engine Torque Indication System Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 164 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
If the engine-mounted torque transducer or FADEC

ECU fails (Figure 95-51) an analog signal is supplied
from the airframe-mounted torque transducer.
The scale changes in conjunction with the OEI flag on As soon as an OEI condition is detected, a Yellow OEI
the display as soon as the IIDS detects a 2 Minute or flag appears above the torque display and the scale of
30 Second OEI range usage when the engine reaches the remaining engine changes as described below:
the above mentioned limits. When coming out of an
OEI condition, either 30 SEC or 2 MIN, the IIDS
• Red scale — > 109.6% (above the red mark)
maintains the appropriate flag and scale on the display
for a period of 3 seconds. The engine torque scales
and marks are described as follows: • Red mark — At 109.6% (30 seconds OEI limit)
• Green scale — From 0 to 80.2% (continuous • Yellow scale at 105.3% to 109.6%

operation) (30 seconds OEI range)
• Yellow mark — At 80.2% (maximum • Red mark at 105.3% (2 minutes OEI limit)
continuous)
• Yellow scale — From 92.8% to 105.3%
• Yellow scale — From 80.3 to 92.8% (maximum 2 minutes, OEI range)
(continuous OEI and T/O)
• Red mark — At 92.8% (at maximum T/O and
• Red mark — At 92.8% (at maximum T/O and continuous OEI limit)
continuous OEI limit)
• Yellow scale — From 80.3% to 92.8%
• Red scale — At 92.8% (above the Red Mark) (T/O and continuous OEI range)
• Dashed Red mark at 105.3% (2 minutes OEI • Yellow Mark — At 80.2% (at maximum
limit) continuous)
• Yellow scale at 80.3% to 105.3% (2 minute • Green scale — From 0% to 80.2% continuous
OEI range) operation)
P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109: The IIDS determines NOTE

if the helicopter is in OEI mode based on NG >70%
and NG split >20%. If only one engine is above 70% If engine torque is greater than or equal to
NG and the NG split between both engines is greater 80.3% the IIDS replaces the OEI flag by
than 20%, then the helicopter is in the OEI mode. If CONT OEI.
both engines are either below or above 70%, the
helicopter is in AEO mode. If the NG input is invalid, If engine torque is greater than or equal to
the IIDS will show OEI mode if the torque split 92.8% the IIDS replaces the CONT OEI
between both engines is greater than 20%. flag by 2 MIN OEI.
P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113: The IIDS If engine torque is greater than or equal to
determines if the helicopter is in OEI mode based on 105.3% the IIDS replaces the 2 MIN OEI
NG >70% and NG split >20%. If only one engine is flag by 30 SEC OEI.
above 70% NG and the NG split between both engines
is greater than 20% or the torque split between both Engine-Mounted Torque Transducer
engines is greater than 20%, the helicopter is in OEI
mode. If the NG input is invalid, the IIDS will show OEI For a description of the engine-mounted torque
mode if the torque split between both engines is transducer, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B
greater than 20%. Operation and Maintenance Manual CSP210000.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-139. Engine-Mounted Torque Transducers — RESULT:

Operational Check
• Engine No. 1 torque indicator reads 50%.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE • If the engine No. 1 torque indicator does not

read 50%, replace the torque transducer.
Barfield Model 2311F Pressure Tester (0-150
or Equivalent PSI) 5. Reduce applied pressure to zero.
RESULT:
NOTE
Use external power during ground • Engine No. 1 torque indicator reads 0%.
depletion. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Disconnect the pressure line from the input port • If the engine No. 1 torque indicator does not
of the engine No. 1 torque pressure transmitter. read 0%, replace the torque transducer.
6. Remove the pressure tester from the engine No.

2. Attach the pressure tester to the input port. 1 torque pressure transmitter.
3. Slowly apply 84.7 PSI to the transmitter input. 7. Connect the engine No. 1 torque transmitter
pressure line.
RESULT:
8. Disconnect pressure line from the input port of
the engine No. 2 torque pressure transmitter.
9. Attach the pressure tester to the input port.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
10. Slowly apply 84.7 PSI to the transmitter input.
• If the engine No. 1 torque indicator does not
read I00%, is 5 VDC measured between RESULT:
engine No. 1 torque pressure transmitter
connector pin A and pin B? If 5 VDC is • Engine No. 2 torque indicator reads 100%.
measured, is there continuity between engine
No. 1 torque pressure transmitter connector CORRECTIVE ACTION:
pin C and 1A71P1 pin 66, and engine No. 1
torque pressure transmitter connector pin D • If the engine No. 2 torque indicator does not
and 1A71P1 pin 67? If there is no continuity, read 100%, is 5 VDC measured between the
repair the wiring. If there is continuity, replace engine No. 2 torque pressure transmitter
the torque transducer. If 5 VDC is not connector pin A and pin B? If 5 VDC is
measured, is there continuity between engine measured, is there continuity between engine
No. 1 torque pressure transmitter connector No. 2 torque pressure transmitter connector
pin A and 1A71P1 pin 64, and engine No. 1 pin C and 1A72P1 pin 66, and engine No. 2
torque pressure transmitter connector pin B torque pressure transmitter connector pin D
and 1A71P1 pin 65? If there is no continuity, and 1A72P1 pin 67? If there is no continuity,
repair the wiring. If there is continuity, replace repair the wiring. If there is continuity, replace
the IIDS. the torque transducer. If 5 VDC is not
measured, is there continuity between engine
4. Reduce applied pressure to approximately 42.3 No. 2 torque pressure transmitter connector
PSI. pin A and 1A72P1 pin 64, and engine No. 2
95-00-00
Page 166 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
torque pressure transmitter connector pin B ECU fails, a white ALT displays below the vertical
and 1A72P1 pin 65? If there is no continuity, scale to indicate that the torque indication signal is
repair the wiring. If there is continuity, replace supplied from the analog airframe-mounted torque
the IIDS. transducer.
11. Reduce applied pressure to approximately 42.3 If there is a complete failure of the engine torque
PSI. system, the digital display shows dashes and a red
FAIL annunciator display shows at the bottom of the
RESULT: associated scale and the colored ribbon empties.
• Engine No. 2 torque indicator reads 50%. The rising ribbon vertical scale and the digital readout
will change color (green/amber/red) accordingly,
CORRECTIVE ACTION: depending on the value displayed.
• If the engine No. 2 torque indicator does not In an OEI situation the scale marking will automatically
read 50%, replace the torque transducer. adjust to the OEI torque operating parameters.
12. Reduce applied pressure to zero. The engine mounted torque transducers are checked
during the FADEC system self test.
RESULT:
95-140. Airframe-Mounted Torque Transducers —
• Engine No. 2 torque indicator reads 0%. Operational Check
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
read 0%, replace the torque transducer.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
13. Remove the pressure tester from the engine No.
2 torque pressure transmitter. Barfield Model 2311F Pressure Tester
or Equivalent (0-150 PSI)
14. Connect the engine No. 2 torque transmitter
pressure line.
NOTE
Airframe-mounted torque transducer (1MT10 and Use external power during ground
1MT11) maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
The IIDS provides a 10 VDC excitation. The torque
transducer contains a pressure diaphragm and a 1. Open the ENG 1 FADEC circuit breaker (CB-F5
strain gauge bridge. As pressure on the diaphragm and F13).
increases, an imbalance is produced on the strain
gauge bridge. This imbalance supplies an output RESULT:
signal proportional to the diaphragm pressure to the
IIDS. • The IIDS displays ALT at the bottom of the
engine No. 1 Q (torque) ribbon.
Engine torque indication
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
The engine torque is shown on the IIDS primary flight
display (Figure 95-27) by vertical scales with a rising • If the IIDS does not show ALT at the bottom of
colored ribbon that shows the torque value. The the engine No. 1 Q (torque) ribbon, is 28 VDC
vertical scales indicate from 0 to 120%. Above each measured at 1A71P2 pin 25? If 28 VDC is
vertical scale is a digital readout of the torque value. If measured at 1A71P2 pin 25, replace circuit
an engine-mounted torque transducer or a FADEC breaker (CB-F5) or circuit breaker (CB-F13). If
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 167
BHT-430-MM-10
28 VDC is not measured at 1A71P2 pin 25, CORRECTIVE ACTION:

replace IIDS.
• If it does not read 0%, replace the transmitter
2. Disconnect the pressure line from the input port (1MT11).
of the engine No. 1 torque pressure transmitter
(1MT11). 7. Remove the pressure tester from the engine No.
1 torque pressure transmitter (1MT11).

8. Connect the engine No. 1 torque transmitter
pressure line.
4. Slowly apply 84.7 PSI to the transmitter input.
9. Close the ENG 1 FADEC circuit breakers (CB-F5
RESULT: and CB-F13).
10. Open the ENG 2 FADEC circuit breakers

(CB-F14 and CB-F6).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
RESULT:
• If the engine No. 1 torque indicator does not • The IIDS displays ALT at the bottom of the
read 100%, is 10 VDC measured between Engine No. 2 Q (torque) scale.
1MT11P1 pin A and pin D? If 10 VDC is
measured, is there continuity between CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1MT11P1 pin B and 1A1P3 pin 3, and
1MT11P1 pin C and 1A1P3 pin 4? If there is • If the IIDS does not show ALT at the bottom of
no continuity, repair the wiring. If there is the engine No. 2 Q (torque) ribbon, is 28 VDC
continuity, replace the torque transmitter. If 10 measured at 1A72P2 pin 25? If 28 VDC is
VDC is not measured, is there continuity measured at 1A72P2 pin 25, replace circuit
between 1MT11P1 pin A and 1A1P3 pin 27, breaker (CB-F14) or circuit breaker (CB-F6). If
and 1MT11P1 pin D and 1A1P3 pin 15? If 28 VDC is not measured at 1A72P2 pin 25,
there is no continuity, repair the wiring. If there replace IIDS.
is continuity, replace the IIDS.
11. Disconnect the pressure line from the input port
5. Reduce applied pressure to approximately of the engine No. 2 torque transmitter (1MT10).
42.3 PSI.
RESULT:
13. Slowly apply pressure of 84.7 PSI to the
transmitter input.
• The engine No. 1 torque indicator reads 50%.
RESULT:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
read 50%, replace the torque transmitter CORRECTIVE ACTION:
(1MT11).
6. Reduce applied pressure to zero. read 100%, is 10 VDC measured between
1MT10P1 pin A and pin D? If 10 VDC is
measured, is there continuity between
RESULT: 1MT10P1 pin B and 1A1P4 pin 3, and
1MT10P1 pin C and 1A1P4 pin 4? If there is
• Engine No. 1 torque indicator reads 0%. no continuity, repair the wiring. If there is
95-00-00
Page 168 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
continuity, replace the torque transmitter. If 10 • Right aft mast torque transducer (1MT22)
VDC is measured, is there continuity between
1MT10P1 pin A and 1A1P4 pin 27, and • Left forward mast torque transducer (1MT21)
1MT10P1 pin D and 1A1P4 pin 15? If there is
no continuity, repair the wiring. If there is • Right forward mast torque transducer
continuity, replace the IIDS. (1MT20)
14. Reduce the pressure to approximately 42.3 PSI.

• A torque indication displayed on the right side
of the IIDS primary screen
RESULT:
Mast torque analog information is supplied from the
• Engine No. 2 indicator reads 50%. four mast torque transducers to the IIDS. A red
annunciator O/TRQ comes on when mast torque is
CORRECTIVE ACTION: over 100%. An overtorque discrete signal is also
provided above 100% mast torque to trigger the
• If the engine No. 2 torque indicator does not collective stick shaker.
read 50%, replace the torque transmitter
(1MT10).
The mast torque scales display is as follows:
15. Lower the pressure to zero.
• Green scale — From 0 to 94.6% (continuous
operation)
RESULT:
• Engine No. 2 torque indicator reads 0%. • Yellow mark — at 94.6%
CORRECTIVE ACTION: • Yellow scale — From 94.6 to 100% (take-off)
• If the engine No. 2 torque indicator does not • Red mark — at 101% (minimum over torque
read 0%, replace the transmitter (1MT10). limit)
16. Remove the pressure tester from the torque • Red scale — Above 101% (maximum torque)
pressure transmitter.
Mast torque transducers (1MT20, 1MT21, 1MT22,
17. Connect the engine No. 2 torque transmitter 1MT23)
pressure line.
The mast torque sensors are incorporated into the four
18. Close ENG 2 FADEC circuit breaker (CB-F14). pylon links which attach the transmission to the
airframe. Each sensor is a foil strain gauge transducer
95-141. MAST TORQUE INDICATING SYSTEM which senses the movement of the transmission by
sensing the loads on each of the four pylon links.
The IIDS displays the mast torque (MQ) on a vertical
scale located between the engine torque. The IIDS Each transducer is supplied with a 10 volt DC
also provides the four mast torque strain gauge excitation voltage from the IIDS and any movement of
transducers with a regulated 10 ±0.5 VDC excitation the pylon link will cause an imbalance of the foil strain
voltage. Each mast torque transmitter input to the IIDS gauge bridge. A bidirectional differential signal,
is a bidirectional millivolt-level signal proportional to proportional to the excitation voltage and the
the 10 VDC excitation voltage and an imbalance of the imbalance of the foil strain gauge will then be
foil strain gauge bridge (Figure 95-52). transmitted to the IIDS and displayed on the IIDS
screen as the MQ rising ribbon.
The mast torque indicating system (Figure 95-52)
consists of: The IIDS will mathematically combine the four strain
gauge outputs (pylon link loads) to give a mast torque
• Left aft mast torque transducer (1MT23) indication.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 169
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-52. Mast Torque Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 170 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
The four transmission links are identified as follows:

NOTE
• Left Forward Link — LF The K1 to K8 constants are pre-determined
values and should not be adjusted in the
• Left Aft Link — LA field.
• Right Forward Link — RF

Table 95-5. Constants Values
• Right Aft Link — RA K1 8.54
A constant value is assigned to each lift link position. K2 6.78

These constants are stored in the IIDS and used to
K3 –6.23
calculate the Percent Mast Torque. The constants are:
K4 –9.98
• K1 — a regression coefficient for the left aft
link. K5 +8600
K6 +189256
• K2 — a regression coefficient for the right
forward link. K7 –0.6
K8 1.0
• K3 — a regression coefficient for the left
forward link. K9 –5320 (nominal)
• K4 — a regression coefficient for the right aft Mast torque calibration

link.
• K5 — a standard output sensitivity for each of NOTE

the four links.
The K9 constant adjustment is by
increments of 10, so that the calculated K9
• K6 — the mast torque value in inch-pounds constant should be rounded up or down to
(in-lbs) equivalent to 100%. the nearest increment of 10.
• K7 — the nominal zero torque strain gauge The K9 constant (the mast torque standard offset
output. value) is used to fine tune the zero of the mast torque
indication (MQ). It should be re-calculated anytime the
• K8 — the tolerance of the nominal zero torque MQ indication does not read zero, after the installation
strain gauge output. of a new pylon link, or after any adjustments to the
transmission restraint system.
• K9 — the mast torque standard offset value.
P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 IIDS display: The K9
The mast torque is then calculated using the following constant must be calculated manually. It should be
algorithm: recalculated each time the MQ indication does not
read zero, after the installation of a new pylon link, or
% torque = –((K1*mvLA + K2*mvRF+ after any adjustments have been made to the
K3*mvLF+K4*mvRA) * (K5/Vexc) + K9)) * (100/K6) – transmission restraint system.
(Zero offset).
P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 IIDS display:
Each of the K1 to K9 constants are adjustable and can The K9 constant is automatically calculated during
be accessed by entering the Mast Torque Calibration power-up of the IIDS and mast torque system. The K9
screen of the IIDS maintenance pages. The following constant can also be calculated manually using the K9
values have been assigned to the constants: Mast Torque Calibration screen (Figure 95-45).
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
The K9 value is found by taking a measurement of the = –5192.68

output voltage of each of the lift link transducers. To
determine the K9 value to be programed into the IIDS, K9 constant to be input into the IIDS = –5192
use the following equation:
P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 IIDS display:
K9 = –[(K1*LA + K2*RF + K3*LF + K4*RA) * (8600/10)] The output voltage for each lift link transducer is
displayed on the Mast Torque Calibration screen
Whereby: (Figure 95-45).
LA = the output of the Left Aft Link in millivolts (mV). At each power-on, the IIDS will carry out a self test and
automatic zero of the mast torque system, as long as
RF = the output of the Right Forward Link in millivolts the NR and the NG of both engines is less than 5%. If
(mV). the self test fails, the cursor and ribbon will not be in
view and the digital readout will display dashes.
LF = the output of the Left Forward Link in millivolts
(mV). Mast torque indication
RA = the output of the Right Aft Link in millivolts (mV). The mast torque is shown on the IIDS Maintenance
Function screen (Figure 95-32) by a vertical scale with
The nominal value for the K9 constant (–5320) can be a rising ribbon that shows the torque value. The vertical
used to give a reliable MQ calibration, but the exact K9 scale reads from 0 to 120%. Above the vertical scale is
constant should be calculated to give an exact zero a digital readout of the mast torque value. The rising
indication on the IIDS display. ribbon and the digital readout changes color (green/
amber/red) accordingly to display values.
Example:
Above the mast torque digital readout, an O/TRQ
annunciation comes up in case of mast torque
overspeed above 100%.
Table 95-6. Pylon Link Data O/TRQ also turns on red master warning and flashes
until reset. In any OEI situation, the scale marking will
LA –0.30mV auto adjust to the OEI mast torque operating
parameters.
RF –0.74mV
LF –0.68mV P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 IIDS display:

During each normal power-on, the IIDS performs a
RA –0.94mV self-test/auto zero of the mast torque system. This
self-test will:
K1 8.54mV
K2 6.78mV • Perform a transmission link sensor zero

stability check (the K8 constant value will be
K3 –6.23mV read from each transmission link).
K4 –9.98mV • Perform a system zero check (the K9 constant
value will be automatically determined, using
Measure the output voltage of each lift link transducer. the mast torque calibration algorithm).
K9 = –(K1*LA + K2*RF + K3*LF + K4*RA) * (8600/10)] The self-test/auto zero will only be valid if system power
has just been applied and Nr and both engine NG are
= –[((8.54*–0.30) + (6.78*–0.74) + (–6.23*–0.68) + less than 5%. If NR or NG is above 5%, the zero offset
(–9.98*–0.94))*860] (K9) calculated at the previous power-on will be used.
= –((–2.562) + (–5.017) + (4.236) + (9.381))*860] If the self-test or auto zero fails, the mast torque digital
readout will show dashes and the cursor and ribbon
= –[6.038 * 860] will be removed from the display.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-142. Mast Torque Calibration (P/N from the IIDS. If the correct excitation voltage is not
430-375-001-105 and -109) measured, check for continuity in the wires. If the
continuity in the wires is satisfactory, replace the IIDS.
If the correct excitation voltage is measured, replace
the transducer and lift link assembly (Chapter 63).
5. Calculate the K9 constant using the following

NUMBER NOMENCLATURE equation: K9= –[((K1 x LA) + (K2 x RF) + (K3 x LF) +
(K4 x RA)) x (8600/10)] (paragraph 95-141).
Mast Torque Strain
Gauge Simulator/
6. Connect the maintenance interconnect connector
Breakout Box
to connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
(Figure 95-54)
pedestal.
Multimeter
NOTE to enter the LH maintenance screen.

maintenance procedures to prevent battery 8. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
depletion. (Figure 95-32), select 10-MAST TORQUE
NOTE 9. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen

Before carrying out a mast torque (Figure 95-45), select SET K9 using the DN switch.
calibration, make sure that all main rotor
blades are installed and the rigging of the 10. Press the SEL switch.
transmission restraint has been carried out.
11. Using the UP or DN switch, adjust for the K9
1. Disconnect the mast torque strain gauge
constant calculated at step 5.
connectors (1MT20P1, 1MT21P1, 1MT22P1, and
1MT23P1).
12. Press the ACCEPT switch.
2. Connect the mast torque strain gauge simulator/
breakout box to the mast torque strain gauge NOTE
connectors (1MT20P1 (RF), 1MT21P1 (LF), 1MT22P1
(RA), 1MT23P1 (LA), 1MT20J1 (RF), 1MT21J1 (LF), If the K9 constant is modified, the 28 VDC
MT22J1 (RA), and 1MT23J1 (LA)). power to the IIDS must be cycled by either
removing helicopter power or opening
circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8, CB-E11
3. Apply external power. and CB-E12) and then closing them again.
4. Measure the output of each strain gauge and 13. Using the UP or DN switch, verify that the mast
record results. torque K1 to K8 constants are at the correct value
(Table 95-5).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
14. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH maintenance
screen.
If an output does not show, measure for 10 VDC
between pins 1 and 2 of the mast torque transducer
connector (1MT20J1 (RF), 1MT21J1 (LF), MT22J1 RESULT:
(RA), and 1MT23J1 (LA)), to make sure that the
transducer is receiving the correct excitation voltage • The mast torque on the IIDS shows 0%.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 173
BHT-430-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 2. Apply external power.
• If the mast torque on the IIDS does not show 3. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press down
zero, carry out steps 4 to 12 to verify the K9 the SEL and C/C switches together for 4 seconds. The
constant. LH maintenance screen displays.
15. Remove the maintenance interconnect connector 4. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
from the connector (4J71). (Figure 95-32), press the DN switch to select
10-MAST TORQUE CALIBRATION.

NOTE
17. Disconnect and remove the mast torque strain Values for K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, K7, and
gauge simulator/breakout box from the mast torque K8 are found in Table 95-5.
strain gauge connectors (1MT20P1, 1MT21P1,
1MT22P1, 1MT23P1, 1MT20J1, 1MT21J1, 1MT22J1, 5. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen, verify that
and 1MT23J1). the mast torque K1 to K8 constants are at the correct
value (Figure 95-45).
18. Connect the mast torque strain gauge connectors
(1MT20P1, 1MT21P1, 1MT22P1, and 1MT23P1). 6. On the Mast Torque Calibration screen
(Figure 95-45), select SET K9 using the DN switch.
95-143. Mast Torque Calibration (P/N

430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) 7. Press the SEL switch.
8. Check that the values of measured links are

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED shown on the Mast Torque Calibration screen, then
press the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches together to
activate the AUTO CALC function.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Harness Assembly
NOTE
NOTE If the K9 constant is modified, the 28 VDC

power to the IIDS must be cycled by either
Use external power during ground removing helicopter power or opening the
maintenance procedures to prevent battery circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8, CB-E11,
depletion. and CB-E12) and then closing them again.

NOTE
Before carrying out a mast torque
11. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH maintenance
calibration, make sure that all main rotor
screen.
blades are installed and the rigging of the
transmission restraint has been carried out.
12. Remove the maintenance harness assembly
from the connector (4J71).
connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
pedestal. 13. Remove external power from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-144. Mast Torque Indicating System — RH screen to see if the dashes show on the
Operational Check secondary LH screen. If the mast torque on
this screen shows zero, enter the IIDS
maintenance screen to check that the
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED constants for K1 to K9 are correct on both the
primary and secondary screens. (Refer to
Table 95-5 for K1 to K8 constant values and
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE make sure the constant for K9 is the same on
both screens.) If the constants for K1 and K9
Mast Torque Strain are correct, replace the IIDS. If the screen
Gauge Simulator/ shows dashes refer to Trouble No. 1,
Breakout Box Figure 95-54.
(Figure 95-53)
4. Press the SWP button below the primary RH
screen of the IIDS.
NOTE
Use external power during ground RESULT:
depletion. • The LH screen of the IIDS shows a zero mast
torque.
NOTE
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Troubleshooting charts for the mast torque
indicating system are found in
• If the mast torque shows dashes, enter the
Figure 95-53.
IIDS maintenance screen to check that the
constants for K1 to K9 are correct on both the
NOTE primary and secondary screens. (Refer to
If any adjustments are carried out on the Table 95-5 for K1 to K8 constant values and
mast torque indicating system, the 28 VDC make sure the constant for K9 is the same on
power to the IIDS must be cycled, either by both screens.) If the constants for K1 and K9
removing the helicopter power or by are correct, replace the IIDS. If the constants
opening circuit breakers (CB-E7, CB-E8, for K1 to K9 are not correct, enter the correct
CB-E11 and CB-E12) and then closing values.
them again.
5. Press the SWP button below the RH screen of
1. Open the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, the IIDS.
CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12).
RESULT:
2. Apply external power to the helicopter.
• A zero mast torque shows on the RH screen
3. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, of the IIDS.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
RESULT:
• If the mast torque is not shown on the RH
• The primary RH screen of the IIDS comes on screen, replace the IIDS.
and shows a zero mast torque.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
7. Disconnect the mast torque strain gauge
• If the mast torque screen shows dashes, connectors (1MT20P1, 1MT21P1, 1MT22P1, and
press the SWP button below the IIDS primary 1MT23P1).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 175
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-53. Mast Torque Strain Gauge Simulator/Breakout Box
95-00-00
Page 176 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-54. Mast Torque Indicating System — Troubleshooting Chart
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 177
BHT-430-MM-10
8. Connect the mast torque strain gauge simulator/ 12. Disconnect and remove the mast torque strain
breakout box to the mast torque strain gauge gauge simulator/breakout box from the mast torque
connectors (1MT20P1 (RF), 1MT21P1 (LF), 1MT22P1 strain gauge connectors (1MT20P1, MT21P1,
(RA), and 1MT23P1 (LA)). 1MT22P1, and 1MT23P1).
9. Set the mast torque strain gauge simulator to the 13. Connect the mast torque strain gauge connectors
lower position. (1MT20P1, 1MT21P1, 1MT22P1, and 1MT23P1).
RESULT: 95-145. GAS PRODUCER TACHOMETER (NG)

INDICATING SYSTEM
• The mast torque on the IIDS shows 0%.
The engine No. 1 and No. 2 engine gas producer
CORRECTIVE ACTION: speed (NG) is displayed on the IIDS primary screen.
The indication is displayed as a digital readout only.
• If the mast torque on the IIDS does not show
0%, enter the IIDS Mast Torque Calibration The engine gas producer (NG) indicating system
Maintenance screen and verify that the K1 to (Figure 95-27 and Figure 95-55) consists of:
K9 constants are correct. (Refer to Mast
Torque System Calibration, paragraph 95-142 • An engine gas producer (NG) magnetic pick-
or paragraph 95-143). up mounted on Engine No. 1 and 2
10. Set the mast torque strain gauge simulator to • FADEC ECU 1 and 2
middle position.
• An engine gas producer (NG) indication
displayed on the IIDS primary screen
RESULT:
The NG speed sensor is a dual coil element with both
coils feeding the FADEC ECU for redundancy. One of
the two coils is shared with the IIDS for (NG) indication
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
(Figure 95-55).
In normal situations, the analog engine gas producer
60%, enter the IIDS Mast Torque Calibration
NG signals drive the IIDS's respective NG digital
Maintenance screen and verify that the K1 to
readout through the respective FADEC-ECU
(Figure 95-55).
Torque System Calibration, paragraph 95-142
or paragraph 95-143).
If the analog input to the IIDS fails, the IIDS NG
indicating system reverts to the ARINC 429 data bus
11. Set the mast torque strain gauge simulator to
digital source from the FADEC ECU, which will drive
higher position.
the IIDS NG scale. In this event, the IIDS will display a
dash line under the digital display to inform the pilot of
RESULT:
a failure in the analog input. In case of total failure, the
display shows dashes in the digital readout.
An IIDS OVSPD legend comes into view on top of the
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NG readouts in case of NG overspeed and is logically
latched until the pilot resets the master warning/
caution light.
110%, enter the IIDS Mast Torque Calibration
Maintenance screen and verify that the K1 to
Torque System Calibration, paragraph 95-142
or paragraph 95-143).
95-00-00
Page 178 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-55. Engine Tachometer (NG/NP) Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
The IIDS drives the ENGINE OUT lights based on the

NOTE
monopole sensor input and triggers the light whenever
the speed is below 56° (NG). Use external power during ground
The IIDS also unlatches the start contactor when 56° depletion.
(NG) is reached during engine starts.
1. Disconnect the NG magnetic pick-up connector
on the engine No. 1.
The NG scales display are as follows:
2. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin C
• White digits: (continuous operation) and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin D of the
engine No. 1 NG magnetic pick-up connector.
from 0% to 105.9% — (P/N 430-375-001-105
and -109) 3. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust it to give
it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of
from 0% to 105% — (P/N 430-375-001-107, 17,851 Hz.
-111, and -113)
RESULT:
• Red digits:
• The engine No. 1 NG on the IIDS shows
100%.
above 106% — (P/N 430-375-001-105 and
-109)
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
above 105% — (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, • If the engine No. 1 NG on the IIDS does not
and -113) show 100%, is there continuity between the
engine No. 1 NG magnetic pick-up connector
Engine gas producer (NG) magnetic pick-up pin C and 1A71P1 pin 36 and the engine No. 1
transmitter NG magnetic pick-up connector pin D and
1A71P1 pin 37? If there is no continuity,
For a description of the engine gas producer (NG) replace the engine No. 1 FADEC harness. If
magnetic pick-up, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B there is continuity, is continuity between
Operation and Maintenance Manual CSP210000. 1A71P1 pin 76 and 1A1P3 pin 62 and 1A71P1
pin 77 and 1A1P3 pin 43? If yes, replace the
engine No. 1 NG magnetic pick-up. If no,
Engine gas producer (NG) indication repair or replace wiring.
The engine gas producer (NG) is shown on the IIDS by 4. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No.
a digital readout of the engine gas producer speed. 1 NG magnetic pick-up connector pins C and D.
The digital readout is above the MGT display on the
primary screen. 5. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin A
and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin B of the
95-146. Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating engine No. 1 NG magnetic pick-up connector.
System — Operational Check
6. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust it to give
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 17851 Hz.
RESULT:
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Audio Oscillator
100%.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
• A dash line shows below the engine No. 1 NG 12. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin A
display. and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin B of the
engine No. 2 NG magnetic pick-up connector.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
13. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust to give an
• If the engine No. 1 NG on the IIDS does not output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of
show 100%, refer to the Rolls-Royce 17851 Hz.
250-C40B Operation and Maintenance
Manual CSP210000 for testing of the FADEC RESULT:
ECU.
• If there is no dash line below the engine No. 1 100%.
NG display, replace the IIDS.
• A dash line shows below the engine No. 2 NG
display.
7. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No.
1 NG magnetic pick-up connector pins A and B.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
8. Disconnect the NG magnetic pick-up connector • If the engine No. 2 NG on the IIDS does not
on the engine No. 2. show 100%, refer to Rolls-Royce 250-C40B
Operation and Maintenance Manual
9. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin C CSP210000 for testing of FADEC ECU.
and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin D of the
engine No. 2 NG magnetic pick-up connector. • If there is no dash line below the engine No. 2
NG display, replace the IIDS.
it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of 14. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No.
17,851 Hz. 2 NG magnetic pick-up connector pins A and B.
15. Connect the connector to the NG magnetic

RESULT: pick-up connector on the engine No. 2.
• The engine No. 2 NG on the IIDS shows 95-147. Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating
100%. System — Magnetic Pick-up Maintenance
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B Operation and

Maintenance Manual CSP210000 for component
• If the engine No. 2 NG on the IIDS does not removal and installation.
show 100%, is there continuity between the
engine No. 2 NG magnetic pick-up connector 95-148. ENGINE SPEED (NP) INDICATING
pin C and 1A72P1 pin 36 and the engine No. 2 SYSTEM
NG magnetic pick-up connector pin D and
1A72P1 pin 37? If there is no continuity, The engine No. 1 and engine No. 2 speed (NP) is
replace the engine No. 2 FADEC harness. If displayed on the IIDS primary screen. The NP is
there is continuity, is there continuity between displayed as a vertical scale with the digital display
1A72P1 pin 76 and 1A1P4 pin 62 and 1A72P1 above.
engine No. 2 NG magnetic pick-up. If no, The engine speed NP indicating system (Figure 95-27
repair or replace wiring. and Figure 95-55) consists of:
11. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No. • Engine speed NP magnetic pick-up mounted
2 NG magnetic pick-up connector pins C and D. on engine No. 1 and No. 2
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 181
BHT-430-MM-10
• FADEC ECU 1 and 2 The engine speed NP is shown on the IIDS by vertical
scales with a rising colored ribbon that shows the NP
• An engine speed (NP) indication displayed on value. The vertical scale reads from 0 to 120°
the IIDS primary screen (Figure 95-27). Above each vertical scale is a digital
readout of the engine speed NP. The rising ribbon
The NP speed sensor is a dual coil element with both vertical scale and the digital readout will change color
coils feeding the FADEC ECU for redundancy. One of (green/amber/red) accordingly depending on display
the two coils is shared with the IIDS for NP indication. value.
In normal situations, the analog engine speed NP 95-149. Engine Speed (NP) Indicating System —
signals drive the IIDS's respective NP scale through Operational Check
the respective FADEC-ECU interface (Figure 95-55).
If the analog input to the IIDS fails, the IIDS NP SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
indicating system reverts to the ARINC 429 data bus
digital source from the FADEC ECU, which will drive
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
the IIDS NP scale. In this event, the IIDS will display
an ALT legend at the bottom of the vertical scale to Audio Oscillator
inform the pilot of a failure. In case of total failure, the
display shows dashes in the digital readout, the FAIL
legend is annunciated at the bottom of the scale, and
NOTE
the ribbon of the vertical scale is removed.
An OVSPD legend comes into view on top of the NP maintenance procedures to prevent battery
readouts in case of NP overspeed and is logically depletion.
latched until the pilot resets the master warning/
caution light. 1. Disconnect the NP magnetic pick-up connector
on the engine No. 1.
The NP scale and mark displays are as follows:
2. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin D
• Green scale with green ribbon — From 0 to and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin E of the
100.9% (continuous operation) engine No. 1 NP magnetic pick-up connector.
• Red mark — At 99.1% (minimum NP) 3. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust it to give
10,304 Hz.
• Yellow Mark — At 101% (minimum CAT A)
• Yellow scales — From 101 to 105.9% RESULT:

(conditional operation range Cat A)
• The engine No. 1 NP on the IIDS shows
100%.
• Red mark — At 106% (maximum permissible
Cat A)
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• Red scale — Above 106%
• If the engine No. 1 NP on the IIDS does not
Engine speed (NP) transmitter engine No. 1 NP magnetic pick-up connector
pin D and 1A71P1 pin 24, and the engine No.
For a description of the engine speed NP magnetic 1 NP magnetic pick-up connector pin E and
pick-up, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B Operation 1A71P1 pin 25? If there is no continuity,
and Maintenance Manual CSP210000. replace the engine No. 1 FADEC harness. If
there is continuity, is there continuity between
Engine speed (NP) indication 1A71P1 pin 74 and 1A1P3 pin 60 and 1A71P1
95-00-00
Page 182 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
pin 75 and 1A1P3 pin 41? If yes, replace the CORRECTIVE ACTION:
engine No. 1 NP magnetic pick-up. If no,
repair or replace wiring. • If the engine No. 2 NP on the IIDS does not
4. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No. engine No. 2 NP magnetic pick-up connector
1 NP magnetic pick-up connector pins D and E. pin D and 1A72P1 pin 24 and the engine No. 2
NP magnetic pick-up connector pin E and
5. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin A 1A72P1 pin 25? If there is no continuity,
and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin B of the replace the engine No. 2 FADEC harness. If
engine No. 1 NP magnetic pick-up connector. there is continuity, is continuity between
1A72P1 pin 74 and 1A1P4 pin 60 and 1A72P1
engine No. 2 NP magnetic pick-up. If no,
repair or replace wiring.
10,304 Hz.

RESULT:
2 NP magnetic pick-up connector pins D and E.
100%. 12. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin A
and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin B of the
• A white ALT shows below the engine No. 1 NP engine No. 2 NP magnetic pick-up connector.
scale.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of
10,304 Hz.
• If the engine No. 1 NP on the IIDS does not
show 100%, refer to Rolls-Royce 250-C40B RESULT:
CSP210000 for testing of the FADEC ECU.
100%.
• If there is no white ALT below the engine No. 1
NP scale, replace the IIDS.
• A white ALT shows below the engine No. 2 NP
7. Remove the audio oscillator from the engine No. scale.
1 NP magnetic pick-up connector pins A and B.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
8. Disconnect the NP magnetic pick-up connector
on the engine No. 1. • If the engine No. 2 NP on the IIDS does not
show 100%, refer to the Rolls-Royce
9. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin D 250-C40B Operation and Maintenance
and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator to pin E of the Manual CSP210000 for testing of the FADEC
engine No. 2 NP magnetic pick-up connector. ECU.
10. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust it to give • If there is no white ALT below the engine No. 2
it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of NP scale, replace the IIDS.
10,304 Hz.
RESULT: 2 NP magnetic pick-up connector pins A and B.
• The engine No. 2 NP on the IIDS shows 15. Connect the connector to the NP magnetic
100%. pick-up connector on the engine No. 2.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 183
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-56. Rotor Speed Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 184 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-150. ROTOR (NR) INDICATING SYSTEM • Yellow mark — At 90% (minimum continuous
operation)
The rotor speed (NR) is displayed on the IIDS primary
screen. The NR is displayed as a vertical scale with • Green scale — From 90 to 105.9%
the digital display above. (continuous operation)
The rotor speed (NR) indicating system (Figure 95-56 • Red mark — At 106% (maximum NR power
and Figure 95-27) consists of: on)
• Red scale — Above 106% (maximum motor

• Rotor speed NR magnetic pick-up mounted on
speed)
the main rotor transmission
Rotor speed (NR) indication
• FADEC ECU 1 and 2
The rotor speed (NR) is shown on the IIDS by vertical
• A pilot rotor speed NR indication displayed on scales with a rising colored ribbon that shows the NR
the IIDS primary screen value. The vertical scale reads from 0 to 120%. Above
each vertical scale is a digital readout of the rotor
The NR speed sensor is a three-coil element. Coil 1 speed. The rising ribbon vertical scale and the digital
feeds the FADEC-ECU 1, coil 2 feeds FADEC-ECU 2 readout changes color (green/amber/red) according to
and coil 3 feeds the IIDS (Figure 95-56). display values.
In normal situations, the analog rotor speed NR signal If the analog rotor coil element of the NR transmitter or
drives the IIDS indication from the NR speed sensor. NR analog signal input to the IIDS fails, the IIDS will
display a dash line under the display source and a
If the analog input to the IIDS fails, the IIDS NR white ALT will be displayed below the vertical scale to
indicating system reverts to the ARINC 429 data bus indicate to the pilot that the IIDS has reverted to digital
digital source from the FADEC ECU, which then will ARINC 429 data bus to display the NR information.
drive the IIDS NR scale. In this event, the IIDS will
display an ALT (alternative) legend at the bottom of If there is a complete failure of the rotor speed
the scale to inform the pilot of a failure of the analog detection system, the digital display will show dashes
input. in the digital readout and a red FAIL will show at the
bottom of the associated scale and the ribbon of the
The IIDS drives an RPM annunciator located on the vertical scale will be removed.
pilot (and copilot, if installed) glareshield panel, based
on the monopole sensor input and triggers the light 95-151. Rotor (NR) Indicating System —
whenever the speed is below 94% or above 105% NR. Operational Check
The IIDS also provides an audio tone to the pilot

headset (and copilot headset, if installed) whenever SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
the rotor speed (NR) decreases below 94%. This audio
warning ceases below 77% and you can mute it if you
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
press the RPM switch light.
Audio Oscillator
The NR scales and marks displays are as follows:
• Red scale — From 0 to 84% (below minimum NOTE

power off)
• Red mark — At 85% (minimum power off) depletion.
• Yellow scale — From 85 to 89% (power off 1. Remove the connector (1G1P1) from the rotor
operation) tachometer magnetic pick-up (1G1).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 185
BHT-430-MM-10
2. Connect the (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin 7. Remove the audio oscillator from the connector
3 of the connector (1G1P1) and the (Lo) lead of an (1G1P1) pin 5 and pin 6.
audio oscillator to pin 4 of the connector (1G1P1).
8. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin 1 of
3. Energize the audio oscillator and adjust it to give the connector (1G1P1) and (Lo) lead of an audio
it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of oscillator to pin 2 of the connector (1G1P1).
1528 Hz.
RESULT: it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of
1528 Hz.
• The NR on the IIDS shows 100%.
RESULT:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the NR on the IIDS does not show 100%,
measure for continuity between 1G1P1 pin 3
• A white ALT shows below the NR scale.
and 1A1P3 pin 42 and 1G1P1 pin 4 and
1A1P3 pin 61. If continuity is not measured,
repair wiring. If continuity is measured, CORRECTIVE ACTION:
replace rotor magnetic pick-up.
• If the NR on the IIDS does not show 100%,
4. Remove the audio oscillator from connector measure for continuity between 1G1P1 pin 1
(1G1P1) pin 3 and pin 4. and 1A72P2 pin 30 and 1G1P1 pin 2 and
1A72P2 pin 29. If continuity is not measured,
repair wiring. If continuity is measured, refer to
5. Connect (Hi) lead of an audio oscillator to pin 5 of
the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B Operation and
connector (1G1P1) and (Lo) lead of an audio oscillator
Maintenance Manual CSP210000 for testing
to pin 6 of connector (1G1P1).
of the FADEC ECU or replace the rotor
magnetic pick-up.
it an output between 1.5 and 5 volts at a frequency of • If there is no white ALT below the NR scale,
1528 Hz. replace the IIDS.
RESULT: 10. Remove the audio oscillator from the connector

(1G1P1) pins 1 and 2.
11. Connect the connector (1G1P1) to the rotor
• A white ALT shows below the NR scale.
tachometer magnetic pick-up (1G1).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
95-152. Rotor (NR) Indicating System —
• If the NR on the IIDS does not show 100%, Maintenance
measure for continuity between 1G1P1 pin 5
and 1A71P2 pin 30 and 1G1P1 pin 4 and Refer to Chapter 63 for component removal and
1A71P2 pin 29. If continuity is not measured, installation.
repair wiring. If continuity is measured, refer to
the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B Operation and 95-153. MEASURED GAS TEMPERATURE (MGT)
Maintenance Manual CSP210000 for testing INDICATING SYSTEM
of the FADEC ECU or replace the rotor
magnetic pick-up. Engine No. 1 and No. 2 are displayed on the IIDS
primary screen in degrees Celsius. Engine MGT is
• If there is no white ALT below the NR scale, displayed as a vertical scale with a digital display
replace the IIDS. above.
95-00-00
Page 186 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
The Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indicating wiring that uses wire consisting of one Chromel
system (Figure 95-57) consists of: conductor and one Alumel conductor.
• Engine No. 1 and No. 2 Chromel-Alumel FADEC-ECU 1 and 2 system interfaces

thermocouples
The FADEC-ECU 1 and 2 system interfaces to the
• FADEC-ECU 1 and FADEC-ECU 2
MGT harness to measure engine temperature. The
FADEC-ECU detects when the engine approaches its
• Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) indication steady state or transient temperature limit and
displayed on the IIDS primary screen prevents limit exceedance. The FADEC-ECU provides
(Figure 95-27) primary MGT information to the IIDS through the
ARINC 429 data bus.
MGT scale markings are as follows:
Measured gas temperature (MGT) indication
• Red triangle at 926.7°C max. start
temperature
The Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) is shown on
• Red scale 871.1°C above the red mark the IIDS by vertical scales that shows the MGT value.
Above each vertical scale, a digital readout displays
the actual MGT level in degrees Celsius. The rising
• Red mark at 871.1°C max. 30 sec.
ribbon vertical scale and the digital readout changes
color (green/amber/red) according to display value.
• Red mark at 827.2°C max. 2 min.
• Red mark at 797.8°C max. 30 min. Each FADEC-ECU ARINC 429 data bus normally
controls the associated MGT scale to display the
engine MGT data (refer to Figure 95-57, which
• Red scale 779.4°C max. T/O
represents the Measured Gas Temperature indicating
system block diagram). If an ARINC 429 data bus fails
• Yellow scale at 779.4 to 797.8°C 30 min.
or a FADEC-ECU fails, the IIDS MGT displayed data
transfers automatically to the associated engine
• Green scale at 0 to 726.7°C continuous Chromel-Alumel thermocouple analog input and an
operation ALT (alternative) advisory displays at the bottom of the
vertical scale to inform the pilot that the normal source
• Yellow scale at 827.2 to 871.1°C max. 30 sec. is not usable.
• Yellow scale at 797.8 to 827.2°C 2 min.

In the event of a total input failure (both digital and
analog), the digital readout displays dashes. An amber
• Yellow scale at 726.7 to 779.4°C max. FAIL legend then displays at the bottom of the related
temperature for continuous operation to max. scale and the ribbon of the vertical scale is removed.
T/O
95-154. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT)

• Yellow mark 726.7°C min. T/O temperature
Indicating System — Operational Check
Engine No. 1 and No. 2 Chromel-Alumel
thermocouples
Four type K (Chromel-Alumel) thermocouples sense
the Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) and are wired
in parallel. The output from the thermocouples is an NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
average output of the four thermocouples and is
Barfield Model Turbine Temperature
supplied to the FADEC-ECU and the IIDS. The engine
TT1000A Indicating System Test
thermocouple harness wiring and all wiring between
Set
the thermocouple harness and the IIDS is special
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 187
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-57. MGT Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 188 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NOTE
Use external power during ground • If the IIDS does not show an amber fail,
maintenance procedures to prevent battery replace the IIDS.
depletion.
• If the IIDS does not show dotted lines in place
NOTE of the digital readout, replace the IIDS.
Refer to the Barfield Model TT1000A 3. Set the Barfield test set FUNCTION switch to
Instruction Manual for additional INDICATOR TEST.
instructions.
4. Set the Barfield test set RESISTANCE RANGE

1. Open the FADEC circuit breakers (CB-F5, CB-F6,
switch to 2M ohm (0 Ohm SYS. RES.).
CB-F13, and CB-F14).
RESULT: NOTE
Connect test leads observing correct
• A white ALT shows below the No. 1 MGT polarity. The black clip connects to the
scale. Alumel lead and the red clip connects to the
Chromel lead.
• A white ALT shows below the No. 2 MGT
scale. 5. Connect the test set leads to the Chromel and
Alumel leads removed from terminal block 1TC1.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
6. Set the Barfield test set ON/OFF switch to ON.
• If the IIDS does not show a white ALT at the
bottom of the engine No. 1 MGT ribbon, is 28
VDC measured at 1A71P2 pin 25? If 28 VDC 7. Slowly rotate the Barfield test set TEMP ADJ
is measured at 1A71P2 pin 25, replace circuit control to read 727°C on the test set digital display.
breaker CB-F5 or replace circuit breaker
CB-F13. If 28 VDC is not measured at RESULT:
1A71P2 pin 25, replace IIDS.
• Engine No. 1 MGT on the IIDS reads 727°C.
• If the IIDS does not show a white ALT at the
bottom of the engine No. 2 MGT ribbon, is 28 CORRECTIVE ACTION:
VDC measured at 1A72P2 pin 25? If 28 VDC
is measured at 1A72P2 pin 25, replace circuit • If the engine No. 1 MGT indication on the IIDS
breaker CB-F14 or replace circuit breaker does not read 727°C, measure continuity
CB-F6. If 28 VDC is not measured at 1A72P2 between 1TC1 terminal A and 1A1P3 pin 2,
pin 25, replace IIDS. and between 1TC1 terminal C and 1A1P3 pin
1. If continuity is not measured, repair the
2. Remove the thermocouple leads, wiring. If continuity is measured, replace the
E203BALML(GRN) and E203BCHROM(WHT), from IIDS.
terminal block 1TC1 on engine No. 1.
NOTE
RESULT:
Rotate the Barfield test set TEMP ADJ
control very slowly or a MGT fault will be
• An amber FAIL shows below the No. 1 MGT detected by the FADEC ECU.
scale.
8. Close the FADEC circuit breakers (CB-F5,
• Dotted lines replace the digital readout. CB-F6, CB-F13, and CB-F14).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 189
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: 14. Set the Barfield test set RESISTANCE RANGE

switch to 2M ohm (0 Ohm SYS. RES.).
• Engine No. 1 MGT on the IIDS shows 727°C.
• There is no white ALT below the No. 1 MGT NOTE

scale. Connect test leads observing correct
polarity. The black clip connects to the
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Alumel lead and the red clip connects to the
Chromel lead.
• If engine No. 1 MGT on the IIDS does not
show 727°C, refer to the Rolls-Royce 15. Connect the test set leads to the Chromel and
250-C40B Operation and Maintenance Alumel leads removed from terminal block 1TC2.
Manual CSP210000 and test the FADEC
system. 16. Set the Barfield test set ON/OFF switch to ON.
• If there is a white ALT below the No. 1 MGT 17. Slowly rotate the Barfield test set TEMP ADJ
scale, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B control to read 727°C on the test set digital display.
CSP210000 and test the FADEC system.
RESULT:
9. Set the Barfield test set ON/OFF switch to OFF • Engine No. 2 MGT on the IIDS reads 727°C.
and disconnect the test set leads from the helicopter
Chromel and Alumel leads. CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the engine No. 2 MGT indication on the IIDS

10. Connect the thermocouple leads E203B
does not read 727°C, measure continuity
ALML(GRN) and E203B CHROM(WHT) to terminal
between 1TC2 terminal A and 1A1P4 pin 2,
block 1TC1 on engine No. 1.
and between 1TC2 terminal C and 1A1P4 pin
1. If continuity is not measured, repair the
11. Open the FADEC circuit breakers (CB-F5, CB-F6, wiring. If continuity is measured, replace the
CB-F13, and CB-F14). IIDS.
12. Remove the thermocouple leads E220B

ALML(GRN) and E220B CHROM(WHT) from terminal NOTE
block 1TC2 on engine No. 2. Rotate the Barfield test set TEMP ADJ
control very slowly or a MGT fault will be
RESULT: detected by the FADEC ECU.
• An amber FAIL shows below the No. 2 MGT 18. Close the FADEC circuit breakers (CB-F5,
scale. CB-F6, CB-F13, and CB-F14).
• Dotted lines replace the digital readout. RESULT:
CORRECTIVE ACTION: • Engine No. 2 MGT on the IIDS shows 727°C.
• If the IIDS does not show an amber fail, • There is no white ALT below the No. 2 MGT
replace the IIDS. scale.
• If the IIDS does not show dotted lines in place CORRECTIVE ACTION:
of the digital readout, replace the IIDS.
• If engine No. 2 MGT on the IIDS does not
13. Set the Barfield test set FUNCTION switch to show 727°C, refer to the Rolls-Royce
INDICATOR TEST. 250-C40B Operation and Maintenance
95-00-00
Page 190 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
Manual CSP210000 and test the FADEC • Red scale — From 0 to 50 PSI (below
system. minimum for idle down to zero)
• If there is a white ALT below the No. 2 MGT • Red marks — At 50 PSI (minimum for idle)
scale, refer to the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B
Operation and Maintenance Manual • Yellow scale — From 51 to 90 PSI (conditional
CSP210000 and test the FADEC system. operation)
19. Set the Barfield test set ON/OFF switch to OFF • Yellow mark — At 90 PSI (minimum
and disconnect the test set leads from the helicopter continuous operation)
Chromel and Alumel leads.
• Green scale — From 91 to 115 PSI
(continuous operation, > 79% and < 94% NG)
20. Connect the thermocouple leads, E203B
ALML(GRN) and E203B CHROM(WHT), to terminal
block 1TC2 on engine No. 2. • Green mark — At 115 PSI (minimum
continuous operation, NG > 94%)
95-155. Measured Gas Temperature (MGT) • Green scale — From 116 to 130 PSI
Indicating System — Maintenance (continuous operation, NG > 94%)
For the thermocouple harness maintenance, refer to • Red mark — At 130 PSI (at maximum
the Rolls-Royce 250-C40B Operation and pressure)
Maintenance Manual CSP210000.
• Red scale — Above > 130 PSI
95-156. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATING
SYSTEM • Red triangle — At 200 PSI (for cold start)
The engine No. 1 and engine No. 2 oil pressure is Engine oil pressure transducers (1MT1 and 1MT2)
displayed in PSI on the IIDS secondary display page
1. The engine oil pressure is displayed as a vertical The engine oil pressure transducer contains a
scale with a digital display above. pressure diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge. The
IIDS provides 10 VDC excitation voltage for the engine
The engine oil pressure indicating system oil pressure transducers 1MT1 and 1MT2. As pressure
(Figure 95-58) consists of: on the diaphragm increases, an imbalance is
produced on the strain gauge bridge. This imbalance
• Engine No. 1 oil pressure transmitter (1MT1) supplies an output signal proportional to the
and engine No. 2 oil pressure transmitter diaphragm pressure to the IIDS.
(1MT2) located in the transmission bay
Engine oil pressure indication
• Engine No. 1 oil pressure switch (1S31) and
The engine oil pressure is shown on the IIDS in PSI by
engine No. 2 oil pressure switch (1S42)
a vertical scale (one for each engine) with a rising
located in the transmission bay
colored ribbon that shows the engine oil pressure. The
vertical scales read from 0 to 150 PSI on secondary
• Engine oil pressure indications that are page 1 and read from 0 to 250 PSI on the start page.
displayed on the secondary display page 1 Above each vertical scale is a digital readout of the oil
and the start page of the IIDS pressure value in PSI. The rising ribbon vertical scale
and the digital readout changes color (green/amber/
• A digital display only if the IIDS is in composite red) according to display values.
mode
If the IIDS display is in composite mode, ENGINE OIL
The engine oil pressure scales and marks are PRESSURE is displayed as a digital readout
displayed as follows: (Figure 95-30).
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 191
BHT-430-MM-10
95-157. Engine Oil Pressure Indicating System — repair the wiring. If continuity is measured,
Operational Check replace the IIDS.
4. Lower the pressure to 0 (zero).

5. Disconnect the pressure tester to the transmitter
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE input line.
Barfield Model Turbine Temperature 6. Connect the oil pressure transmitter 1MT1 on
TT1000A Indicating System Test engine No. 1.
Set
7. Disconnect the oil pressure transmitter 1MT2 on
engine No. 2.
NOTE
Use external power during ground 8. Attach the pressure tester to the transmitter input.
depletion.
1. Disconnect the pressure input line from the oil CAUTION

pressure transmitter 1MT1 on engine No. 1.
2. Attach the pressure tester to the transmitter input NEVER APPLY MORE THAN 110 PSI.
line. DAMAGE CAN RESULT.
9. Slowly apply 100 ±10 PSI pressure to the

CAUTION
RESULT:
NEVER APPLY MORE THAN 110 PSI. • ENG 2 OIL PRESS indication reads 100
DAMAGE CAN RESULT. ±10 PSI.
3. Slowly apply 100 ±10 PSI pressure to the CORRECTIVE ACTION:

• If the engine No. 2 oil pressure indication does
RESULT: not read 100 PSI, is 10 VDC measured
between 1MT2P1 pin A and pin D? If 10 VDC
• ENG 1 OIL PRESS indication reads 100 PSI. is measured, is continuity measured between
1MT2P1 pin B and 1A1P4 pin 24, and
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 1MT2P1 pin C and 1A1P4 pin 8? If no
continuity is measured, repair the wiring. If
• If the engine No. 1 oil pressure indication does continuity is measured, replace the pressure
not read 100 PSI, is 10 VDC measured transmitter. If 10 VDC is not measured, is
between 1MT1P1 pin A and pin D? If 10 VDC continuity measured between 1MT2P1 pin A
is measured, is there continuity measured and 1A1P4 pin 24 and 1MT2P1 pin D and
between 1MT1P1 pin B and 1A1P3 pin 7, and 1A1P4 pin 18? If no continuity is measured,
1MT1P1 pin C and 1A1P3 pin 8? If no repair the wiring. If continuity is measured,
continuity is measured, repair the wiring. If replace the IIDS.
continuity is measured, replace the pressure
transmitter. If 10 VDC is not measured, is 10. Lower the pressure to 0 (zero).
continuity measured between 1MT1P1 pin A
and 1A1P3 pin 24, and 1MT1P1 pin D and 11. Disconnect the pressure tester from the
1A1P3 pin 18? If no continuity is measured, transmitter input line.
95-00-00
Page 192 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
12. Connect the oil pressure transmitter (1MT2) on

engine No. 2. Table 95-7. Resistance Value for Engine Oil
Temperature, Hydraulic Temperature, Transmission
95-158. ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATING Temperature, and Fuel Temperature Probes
SYSTEM
°C OHMS °C OHMS
The engine No. 1 and No. 2 oil temperature is
displayed on the IIDS secondary screen page 1 in –70 68.27 ±.50 60 112.28 ±.50
degrees Celsius. The engine oil temperature is
–60 71.19 ±.50 70 116.27 ±.50
displayed as a vertical scale with a digital display
above (Figure 95-28). –50 74.24 ±.40 80 120.36 ±
The engine oil temperature indicating system consists –40 77.39 ±.40 90 124.55 ±.50
of:
–30 80.56 ±.40 100 128.85 ±.50
• Engine No. 1 oil temperature sensor (1RT11) –20 83.77 ±.40 110 133.26 ±.50
• Engine No. 2 oil temperature sensor (1RT12) –10 87.04 ±.40 120 137.78 ±.60
0 90.38 ±.40 130 142.40 ±.60

• Oil temperature indication displayed on page
1 of the secondary screen 10 93.80 ±.40 140 147.11 ±.80
The engine oil temperature scales and marks are 20 97.31 ±.40 150 151.91 ±.60
displayed as follows:
30 100.91 ±.40 200 177.95 ±1.00
• Red scale — From –50°C to 0°C (below 40 104.60 ±.40 250 208.00 ±1.00
minimum continuous operation)
50 108.39 ±.40 300 242.70 ±1.50
• Red mark — At 0°C (minimum continuous
operation) Engine oil temperature indication
• Green scale — From 1°C to 107°C

The engine oil temperature is shown on the IIDS in
(continuous operation)
degrees Celsius by a vertical scale with a rising
colored ribbon that shows the engine oil temperature.
• Red mark — At 107°C (maximum
The vertical scale reads from –50 to –120°C on
temperature)
secondary page 1 (Figure 95-28). Above the vertical
scale is a digital readout of the transmission oil
• Red scale — Above 107°C
temperature value in degrees Celsius. The rising
ribbon scale and the digital readout change color
Engine oil temperature sensors
(green/amber/red) according to display values.
The engine No. 1 oil temperature sensor (1RT11) and
engine No. 2 oil temperature sensor (1RT12) are If the IIDS display is in composite mode, the engine oil
variable resistance bulbs. The resistance of the temperature will not be displayed.
temperature sensor varies with the temperature
applied to it. See Table 95-7 for resistance versus Figure 95-58 represents the engine oil pressure and
temperature values. temperature block diagram.
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 193
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-58. Engine Oil Pressure and Temperature Block Diagram
95-00-00
Page 194 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
95-159. Engine Oil Temperature Indicating System temperature probe removal procedure). If
— Operational Check correct, measured continuity between the
1RT12P1 pin A and 1A1P4 pin 6, and
1RT12P1 pin B and 1A1P4 pin 5. If continuity
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED is measured, replace the IIDS. If no continuity
is measured, repair or replace the wiring.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
95-160. HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE INDICATING
Multimeter SYSTEM
NOTE The hydraulic oil pressure is displayed on the IIDS

secondary page 2 display in PSI. The hydraulic oil
Use external power during ground pressure is displayed as a vertical scale with a digital
maintenance procedures to prevent battery display above.
depletion.
The hydraulic oil pressure indicating system
1. Read the IIDS engine No. 1 oil temperature digital
(Figure 95-59) consists of:
readout.
• Hydraulic oil pressure transducer (1MT3) for
RESULT:
hydraulic system No. 1 and (1MT4) for
hydraulic system No. 2. The transducers are
• The IIDS indicates the approximate engine located in the transmission bay.
No. 1 oil ambient temperature.
• An analog and digital hydraulic oil pressure
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
indication is displayed on the IIDS secondary
screen page 2 (Figure 95-28).
• If the IIDS does not indicate the approximate
engine No. 1 oil temperature, is the resistance
The hydraulic oil pressure scales and marks are
measured between pin A and B of 1RT11
between 74.24 ohms and 137.78 ohms? If not
correct, replace the oil temperature probe
1RT11 (refer to Chapter 79 for the engine oil • Red scale ≥1700 PSI (maximum pressure)
temperature probe removal procedure). If
correct, measure continuity between 1RT11P1 • Yellow scale 1601 to 1700 PSI (conditional
pin A and 1A1P3 pin 6, and 1RT11P1 pin B operation)
and 1A1P3 pin 5. If continuity is measured,
replace the IIDS. If no continuity is measured, • Green scale 1300 to 1600 PSI (continuous
repair or replace the wiring. operation)
2. Read the IIDS engine No. 2 oil temperature digital • Yellow scale 1000 to 1299 PSI (minimum
readout. pressure transient)
RESULT: • Red scale 0 to 999 PSI (below minimum

• The IIDS indicates the approximate engine pressure)
No. 2 oil ambient temperature.
Hydraulic oil pressure transducer (1MT3 and
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 1MT4)
• If the IIDS does not indicate the approximate The hydraulic oil pressure transducer contains a
engine No. 2 oil temperature, is the resistance pressure diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge. The
measured between pin A and B of 1RT12 IIDS provides a 10 VDC excitation voltage for the
between 74.24 ohms and 137.78 ohms? If not hydraulic oil pressure transducers. As pressure on the
correct, replace the oil temperature probe diaphragm increases, an imbalance is produced on
1RT12 (refer to Chapter 79 for the engine oil the strain gauge bridge. This imbalance supplies an
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 195
BHT-430-MM-10
output signal proportional to the diaphragm pressure CORRECTIVE ACTION:

to the IIDS.
• If the LOW PRESS caution does not go off at
Hydraulic oil pressure indication 1200 PSI, refer to Hydraulic system
operational check (Chapter 96).
The hydraulic oil pressure is shown on the IIDS, in
PSI, by a vertical scale (one for each hydraulic 4. Adjust the external hydraulic pressure to
system) with a rising colored ribbon that shows the 1500 PSI.
hydraulic oil pressure. The vertical scales read from 0
to 2000 PSI on secondary page 2 (Figure 95-28).
RESULT:
Above each vertical scale is a digital readout of the
hydraulic oil pressure value in PSI. The rising ribbon
vertical scale and the digital readout change color • The No. 1 hydraulic oil pressure indication
(green/amber/red) according to display values. reads 1500 ±100 PSI.
If the IIDS display is in composite mode, hydraulic oil • If the No. 1 hydraulic oil pressure does not
pressure will not be displayed. read 1500 ±100 PSI, is 10 VDC measured
between 1MT3P1 pin A and B? If 10 VDC is
Figure 95-59 represents the hydraulic oil pressure and not measured, is continuity measured
temperature block diagram. between 1MT3P1 pin C and 1A1P3 pin 11 and
1MT3P1 pin D and 1A1P3 pin 12? If no
95-161. Hydraulic Oil Pressure Indicating System continuity is measured, repair the wiring. If
— Operational Check continuity is measured, replace the hydraulic
oil pressure transducer 1MT3. If 10 VDC is
measured, is continuity measured between
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED 1MT3P1 pin A and 1A1P3 pin 23, 1MT3P1 pin
B and 1A1P3 pin 19? If no continuity is
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE measured, repair the wiring. If continuity is
measured, replace the IIDS.
Commercial Hydraulic Test Stand
2300 PSI (15,860 KPa) CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Pressure Maximum,
8.0 gal/min (30.2 L/min), • If No. 2 hydraulic oil pressure does not read
10 micron (390 1500 ±100 PSI, is 10 VDC measured between
microinch) filter 1MT4P1 pin A and B? If 10 VDC is measured,
is continuity measured between 1MT4P1 pin
C and 1A1P4 pin 11 and 1MT4P1 pin D and
NOTE
1A1P4 pin 12? If no continuity is measured,
Use external power during ground repair the wiring. If continuity is measured,
maintenance procedures to prevent battery replace the hydraulic oil pressure transducer
depletion. 1MT4. If 10 VDC is measured, is continuity
measured between 1MT4P1 pin A and 1A1P4
1. Set page 2 of the IIDS secondary screen. pin 23, and 1MT4P1 pin B and 1A1P4 pin 19?
If no continuity is measured, repair the wiring.
2. Apply external hydraulic power to the helicopter If continuity is measured, replace the IIDS.
hydraulic system (Chapter 29).
5. Make sure the external hydraulic pressure is
3. Slowly increase hydraulic pressure. constant at 1500 PSI.
RESULT: RESULT:
• LOW PRESS caution below hydraulic • The No. 2 hydraulic oil pressure indication
pressure indication will go off at 1200 PSI. reads 1500 ±100 PSI.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-59. Hydraulic Oil Pressure and Temperature Block Diagram
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 197
BHT-430-MM-10
6. Reduce hydraulic pressure. The hydraulic oil temperature scales and marks are
RESULT:
• Red scales > 88°C (maximum temperature)
• LOW PRESS comes on below HYD 1
indicator at 1000 PSI. • Green scale –50 to 88°C (continuous
operation)
• LOW PRESS comes on below HYD 2
indicator at 1000 PSI. Hydraulic oil temperature bulb (1RT25 and 1RT26)
CORRECTIVE ACTION: The hydraulic No. 1 oil temperature sensor (1RT25)

and engine No. 2 oil temperature sensor (1RT26) are
• If the LOW PRESS caution does not come on variable resistance bulbs. The resistance of the
the HYD 1 indicator at 1000 PSI, refer to temperature sensor varies with the temperature
hydraulic system operational check. applied to it. See Table 95-7 for resistance versus
temperature values.
• If the LOW PRESS caution does not come on
the HYD 2 indicator at 1000 PSI, refer to Hydraulic oil temperature indication
hydraulic system operational check.
The hydraulic oil temperature is shown on the IIDS in
7. Shut down the external hydraulic power unit. degrees Celsius by a vertical scale with a rising
colored ribbon that shows the hydraulic oil
temperature. The vertical scale reads from –50 to
CAUTION 150°C on secondary page 2 (Figure 95-28). Above the
vertical scale is a digital readout of the transmission oil
MAKE SURE NO HYDRAULIC ribbon scale and the digital readout change color
PRESSURE REMAINS IN THE (green/amber/red) according to display values.
HELICO PTER HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT EXTERNAL If the IIDS display is in composite mode, the hydraulic
HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT. oil temperature will not be displayed.
8. Disconnect the external hydraulic power unit. Figure 95-59 represents the oil pressure and
temperature block diagram.
95-162. HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE
INDICATING SYSTEM 95-163. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicating
System — Operational Check
The hydraulic oil temperature is displayed on the IIDS
secondary page 2 displays in degrees Celsius. The
hydraulic oil temperature is displayed as a vertical SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
scale with a digital display above (Figure 95-28).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
The hydraulic oil temperature indicating system
consists of: Multimeter
• Hydraulic oil temperature bulb (1RT25) for

hydraulic system No. 1 and (1RT26) for NOTE
hydraulic system No. 2. The oil temperature Use external power during ground
bulbs are located in the transmission bay. maintenance procedures to prevent battery
depletion.
• An analog and digital hydraulic oil temperature
indication displayed on the IIDS secondary 1. Read the IIDS hydraulic No. 1 oil temperature
screen page 2. digital readout.
95-00-00
Page 198 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: The transmission oil pressure indicating system

consists of:
• The oil temperature digital readout indicates
the approximate hydraulic No. 1 oil ambient • Transmission oil pressure transducer (1MT5)
temperature. located in the transmission bay.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: • An analog and digital transmission oil

pressure indication displayed on the IIDS
• If the hydraulic No. 1 oil temperature does not secondary screen page 1 and on the start
indicate the approximate hydraulic No. 1 oil page.
ambient temperature, is the resistance
measured between pin A and B of 1RT25P1 • A digital display only if IIDS is in composite
between 74.24 ohms and 151.91 ohms? If not mode.
correct, replace the hydraulic oil temperature
probe 1RT25 (refer to Chapter 29 for the The transmission oil pressure scales and marks are
hydraulic oil temperature probe removal displayed as follows:
procedure). If correct, make sure there is
continuity between the temperature probe and • Red scale — From 0 to 30 PSI (below
the IIDS. If there is continuity, replace the minimum for idle down to zero).
IIDS. If there is no continuity, repair or replace
the wiring. • Red mark — At 30 PSI (minimum for idle).
2. Read the hydraulic 2 oil temperature digital • Yellow scale — From 31 to 50 PSI (conditional
readout. operation).
• Yellow mark — At 50 PSI (minimum

RESULT:
conditional operation).
• The hydraulic oil temperature digital readout • Green scale — From 51 to 70 PSI (continuous
indicates the approximate hydraulic No. 2 oil operation).
ambient temperature.
• Red Mark — At 70 PSI (at maximum
CORRECTIVE ACTION: pressure).
• If the hydraulic No. 2 oil temperature does not • Red scale — Above 70 PSI.
indicate the approximate hydraulic No. 2 oil
ambient temperature, is the resistance Transmission oil pressure transducer (1MT5)
measured between pin A and B of 1RT26P1
between 72.24 Ohms and 151.91 ohms? If not The transmission oil pressure transducer contains a
correct, replace the oil temperature probe pressure diaphragm and a strain gauge bridge. The
1RT26 (refer to Chapter 29 for the hydraulic IIDS provides a 10 VDC excitation voltage for the
oil temperature probe removal procedure). If transducer. As pressure on the diaphragm increases,
correct, make sure there is continuity between an imbalance is produced on the strain gauge bridge.
the temperature probe and the IIDS. If there is This imbalance supplies an output signal proportional
continuity, replace the IIDS. If there is no to the pressure on the diaphragm to the IIDS.
continuity, repair or replace the wiring.
Transmission oil pressure indication
95-164. TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
INDICATING SYSTEM The transmission oil pressure is shown on the IIDS in
PSI by a vertical scale with a rising colored ribbon that
The transmission oil pressure is displayed on the IIDS shows the transmission oil pressure. The vertical
secondary page 1 (Figure 95-28), in PSI. The scales read from 0 to 100 PSI on secondary page 1
transmission oil pressure is displayed as a vertical (Figure 95-28) and on the start page (Figure 95-29).
scale with a digital display above. Above the vertical scale is a digital readout of the
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 199
BHT-430-MM-10
transmission oil pressure value in PSI. The rising CORRECTIVE ACTION:

ribbon scale and the digital readout change color
(green/amber/red) according to display values. • If the transmission oil pressure indication does
not read 70 PSI, is 10 VDC measured
If the IIDS display is in composite mode, the between 1MT5P1 pin A and pin D? If 10 VDC
transmission oil pressure is displayed in a digital is measured, is continuity measured between
format only (Figure 95-30). 1MT5P1 pin B and 1A1P3 pin 13, and
1MT5P1 pin C and 1A1P3 pin 14? If no
Figure 95-60 represents the transmission oil pressure continuity is measured, repair the wiring. If
and temperature block diagram. continuity is measured, replace the pressure
transmitter. If 10 VDC is measured, is there
continuity between 1MT4P1 pin A and 1A1P3
95-165. Transmission Oil Pressure Indicating pin 22, and 1MT5P1 pin D and 1MT5P1 pin D
System — Operational Check and 1A1P3 pin 20? If no continuity is
measured, repair the wiring. If continuity is
measured, replace the IIDS.
5. Reduce the pressure to 0 (zero).
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Barfield 2311F or Pressure Tester 6. Remove the pressure tester from the
Equivalent transmission oil pressure transducer.
7. Connect the pressure input line to the transducer.

NOTE
Use external power during ground 95-166. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
maintenance procedures to prevent battery INDICATING SYSTEM
depletion.
The transmission oil temperature is displayed in
1. Set page 1 of the IIDS secondary screen. degrees Celsius on the IIDS secondary page 1
(Figure 95-28). The transmission oil temperature is
displayed as a vertical scale with a digital display
above.
CAUTION
The transmission oil temperature indicating system
NEVER APPLY MORE THAN 100 PSI TO consists of:
THE TRANSMITTER.
• A transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT1)
2. Disconnect the pressure input line from the located in the transmission bay.
transmission oil pressure transmitter (1MT5).
• An analog and digital transmission oil
temperature indication displayed on the IIDS
3. Attach the pressure tester to the transmission
secondary screen page 1.
transducer input (1MT5).
The transmission oil temperature scales and marks

4. Slowly apply 70 ±7 PSI pressure to the are displayed as follows:
transducer input.
• Green scale — From 20°C to 110°C
RESULT: (continuous operation).
• The XMSN OIL PRESS indicator reads 70 ±7 • Red mark — At 20°C (minimum continuous
PSI. operation).
95-00-00
Page 200 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
110°C
(110°C)
430_MM_95_0060
Figure 95-60. Transmission Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
• Red mark — At 110°C (at maximum 1. Read the transmission oil temperature digital
temperature). readout.
• Red scale — From –50°C to 19°C (below RESULT:

minimum continuous operation).
• The transmission oil temperature digital
• Red scale — Above 110°C. readout is the approximate transmission oil
ambient temperature.
Transmission oil temperature bulb (1RT1)
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
The transmission oil temperature sensor (1RT1) is a • If the digital readout is not the approximate
variable resistance bulb. The resistance of the transmission oil ambient temperature,
temperature sensor varies with the temperature disconnect the oil temperature bulb connector
applied to it. See Table 95-7 for resistance versus 1RT1P1. Is the resistance between 1RT1P1
temperature values. pin A and pin B between 72.24 ohms and
151.91 ohms? If not correct, change the
Transmission oil temperature indication transmission oil temperature bulb (refer to
Chapter 63 to remove the temperature bulb).
The transmission oil temperature is shown on the IIDS If the resistance is correct, is continuity
in degrees Celsius by a vertical scale with a rising measured between 1RT1P1 pin B and 1A1P3
colored ribbon that shows the transmission oil pin 34, and 1RT1P1 pin A and 1A1P3 pin 35?
temperature. The vertical scale reads from –50°C to If there is no continuity, repair or replace the
150°C on secondary page 1 (Figure 95-28). Above the wiring as required. If continuity is measured,
vertical scale is a digital readout of the transmission oil replace the IIDS.
ribbon scale and the digital readout change color 95-168. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATING SYSTEM
(green/amber/red) according to display values.
The IIDS uses the analog signal from fuel quantity
transmitters (1Z3 and 1Z4) located in the left and right
If the IIDS display is in composite mode, the
fuel cells to display the fuel quantity on the IIDS
transmission oil temperature will not be displayed.
secondary screen page 1 in pounds (LBS) or
kilograms (Kg). The IIDS also uses the analog signal
Figure 95-60 represents the transmission oil pressure from the temperature probe (1MT12) located in the
and temperature indicating system block diagram. right fuel cell to display the fuel temperature on the
IIDS start page. If a separate auxiliary fuel system is
95-167. Transmission Oil Temperature Indicating installed (Chapter 99), the IIDS will display the
System — Operational Check auxiliary fuel quantity on the secondary screen page 2,
as well as adding it to the totalizer readout on
secondary page 1.
Figure 95-61 represents the complete fuel indicating
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE system block diagram.
Fluke 8060A or Multimeter 1. The fuel indicating system consists of:

Equivalent
• Two capacitive fuel probes, 1Z3 and 1Z4,
located in the left and right fuel cells.
NOTE
Use external power during ground • A fuel quantity indicating system displayed on
maintenance procedures to prevent battery the IIDS secondary screen page 1 and
depletion. composite mode.
95-00-00
Page 202 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
50 ± 20 lbs
Figure 95-61. Fuel Indicating System Block Diagram
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 203
BHT-430-MM-10
• An auxiliary fuel quantity indicating system is The fuel probe system takes advantage of the inherent
provided on secondary page 2 (Figure 95-28) self-compensation of a capacitive system to give an
and in the composite mode (Figure 95-30) if accurate indication of fuel quantity, with compensation
the auxiliary fuel system is installed (Chapter for variations in fuel density at all levels of fuel.
99).
Fuel quantity indicating system
• A resistive auxiliary fuel quantity probe (1Z12)
if the auxiliary system is installed (Chapter The fuel quantity is shown on the IIDS secondary
99). screen page 1 by vertical scales with a rising blue
ribbon and thin blue vertical lines (Figure 95-28).
Low level warning Below each vertical scale, a digital readout displays
the actual fuel quantity level in pounds (lbs) or
kilograms (kg), depending of the selection on the
The low level warning is completely independent of the
parameter set-up page (Figure 95-40). In addition to
fuel quantity system and is controlled by a thermistor
the left and right digital readouts, a totalizer readout is
mounted on the lower tank fuel probes. When the fuel
provided in the middle of the two vertical scales. The
level on the IIDS shows 50 ±20 pounds (22.68 ±9.07
range of the two vertical scales is from 0 to full tank.
kg), the fuel level is below the level of the thermistor
and the resistance of the thermistor changes due to its
The quantity range is set through the IIDS fuel
reduced ability to dissipate heat. The change in
calibration page set-up procedure. If the IIDS display
thermistor resistance is detected by a circuit inside the
is in composite mode, the fuel quantity will be
IIDS unit. Which will then trigger the FUEL LOW 1 or
displayed as a digital readout.
FUEL LOW 2 caution and turn the fuel quantity display
ribbon and digital readout to red (430-375-001-105
Auxiliary fuel quantity indicating system
and -109) or amber (430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
on the IIDS display. The IIDS caution light will go out
If a separate auxiliary fuel system is installed, the IIDS
when the fuel level increases above 100 pounds
will display a digital readout of the auxiliary fuel
(45.36 kg).
quantity (from 0 to 325 pounds (0 to 147.42 kg) in the
center of the secondary screen page 2 (Figure 95-28)
If the thermistor fails, the fuel quantity display will turn and in the composite mode (Figure 95-30). The fuel
to red (430-375-001-105 and -109) or amber totalizer will include the auxiliary fuel quantity when
(430-375-001-107, -111, and -113) at 50 pounds that option is set.
(22.68 kg) of fuel remaining, but FUEL LOW 1 or
FUEL LOW 2 caution will not come on. The auxiliary fuel quantity system can be selected to
either show on the display or, if not installed, be
Fuel probes (1Z3 and 1Z4) removed from the display. This is achieved by
accessing the maintenance screen’s configuration
Two capacitive fuel probes (1Z3 and 1Z4) provide page.
analog inputs to the IIDS. They are each equipped
with a thermistor for detection of fuel low-level signal.
NOTE
This thermistor causes a LOW QTY caution on the
IIDS display to come on at approximately 50 ±20 If the auxiliary fuel system is removed or
pounds (22.68 ±9.07 kg) of remaining fuel. disconnected, ensure that the AUX FUEL
setting in the maintenance screen
The fuel probes act as sensing capacitors in the configuration page is DISABLED, or
system. The value of capacitance is determined by: Totalizer Display will be inactive.
A complete description of the auxiliary fuel system is in

• The level of fuel between concentric inner and Chapter 99.
outer tubes.
Auxiliary resistive fuel probe (1Z12)
• The density of the fuel.
A resistive fuel probe (1Z12) provides analog inputs to
• The profiling of the tubes. the IIDS (Chapter 99).
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-169. Fuel Quantity Indicating System — turns red (430-375-001-105 and -109) or
Operational Check amber (430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
when the fuel level of the left fuel tank shows
50 ±20 pounds (22.68 ±9.07 kg), is resistance
NOTE
between connector 1Z3J1 pins D and E
Use external power during ground between 650 and 1500 ohms and between
maintenance procedures to prevent battery 1Z3J1 pins D and F between 360 and 440
depletion. ohms? If no, replace the thermistor on the left
fuel probe. If yes, is the left tank lower fuel
1. Set page 1 of the IIDS secondary screen. probe installed correctly (fixed clamp mounted
at top of probe). If no, install the fuel probe
RESULT: correctly (Chapter 28). If yes, is continuity
measured between connector 1Z3P1 pin D
• The fuel quantity is approximately the amount and 1A1P3 pin 45, 1Z3P1 pin E and 1A1P3
of fuel present in the left and right fuel tanks pin 77 and 1Z3P1 pin F and 1A1P3 pin 47? If
and the digital totalizer indicates no, repair or replace the wiring. If yes, replace
approximately the total fuel quantity in the the IIDS.
helicopter fuel system.
• If the right side fuel LOW QTY caution light
CORRECTIVE ACTION: does not come on and the fuel quantity ribbon
turns red (430-375-001-105 and -109) or
• If the IIDS fuel quantity is not approximately amber (430-375-001-107, -111, and -113)
the amount of fuel present in the left and right when the fuel level of the right fuel tank shows
tanks and the digital totalizer does not indicate 50 ±20 pounds (22.68 ±9.07 kg), is resistance
approximately the total fuel quantity in the between connector 1Z4J1 pins D and E
helicopter fuel system, refer to the calibration between 650 and 1500 ohms and between
procedure, paragraph 95-173. 1Z4J1 pins D and F between 360 and 440
ohms? If no, replace the thermistor on the
95-170. Fuel Quantity Indicating System — right fuel probe. If yes, is the right tank lower
Operational Check (No Test Equipment fuel probe installed correctly (fixed clamp
Required) mounted at top of probe). If no, install the fuel
probe correctly (Chapter 28). If yes, is
continuity measured between connector
NOTE
1Z4P1 pin D and 1A1P4 pin 45, 1Z4P1 pin E
Use external power during ground and 1A1P4 pin 77 and 1Z4P1 pin F and
maintenance procedures to prevent battery 1A1P4 pin 47? If no, repair or replace the
depletion. wiring. If yes, replace the IIDS.
1. Defuel the helicopter (Chapter 12). 2. Refuel the helicopter (Chapter 12).
RESULT:
RESULT:
• The left side fuel LOW QTY caution light
comes on when the fuel level of left fuel tank • The left side fuel LOW QTY caution light goes
shows 50 ±20 pounds (22.68 ±9.07 kg). off.
• The right side fuel LOW QTY caution light • The right side fuel LOW QTY caution light
comes on when the fuel level of right fuel tank goes off.
shows 50 ±20 pounds (22.68 ±9.07 kg).
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the left side fuel LOW QTY caution light
• If the left side fuel LOW QTY caution light stays on, verify that the left tank lower fuel
does not come on and the fuel quantity ribbon probe is correctly installed in the tank (Chapter
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
28). If the fuel probe is correctly installed 3. Connect the Barfield 2643GA-430 adaptor
(fixed clamp at the top), replace the IIDS. harness box between the connector (1Z4P1) and the
fuel probes (1Z4) to the Barfield 2643-GA fuel gauging
• If the right side fuel LOW QTY caution light test set.
stays on, verify that the right tank lower fuel
probe is correctly installed in the tank (Chapter 4. Connect the right connector of the adaptor
28). If the fuel probe is correctly installed harness box to the fuel gauging test set.
(fixed clamp at the top), replace the IIDS.
5. Connect the Barfield 2544-GA capacitance
95-171. Fuel Quantity Indicating System — simulator to the fuel gauging test set connector (290-F
Operational Check (Using Test or SIMULATOR).
Equipment)
6. Set the LOW LEVEL switch on the adaptor
harness box to THRU.
7. Set the FUNCTION control on the fuel gauging
test set to BATT CK.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
8. Push in and hold the TEST button.
Barfield 2643-GA Fuel Gauging Test
Set RESULT:
Barfield 2544-FA Capacitance
Simulator • The test set indication must indicate in the
BATT CK region.
Barfield Adaptor Harness Box
2643-GA-430 CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If not, replace the battery of the Barfield

2643-GA test set.
NOTE
Use external power during ground 9. Release the TEST button.
depletion. 10. Set the FUNCTION switch on the fuel gauging
test set to TANKS.
NOTE
11. Set the RANGE switch on the fuel gauging test
Drain fuel tanks completely before you set to CAL.
proceed with the test that follows. Refer to
Barfield 264-GA Instruction Manuals for
additional instructions. 12. Set the MAIN/AUX switch on the fuel gauging test
set to MAIN.
13. Push in and hold the TEST button and adjust the
CAL ADJ button until the meter pointer aligns with the
CAL mark on the fuel gauging test set.
1. Open all four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, 14. Release the TEST button.
15. Set the RANGE switch on the fuel gauging test
2. Disconnect the right fuel quantity probes set to 90.
connector (1Z4P1) located on the right side sump
plate. 16. Push in and hold the TEST button.
95-00-00
Page 206 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
RESULT: manual (BHT-430-CR&O-V.1, Chapter 28). If

the tank unit capacitance is correct, repair the
• The tank capacitance indication is between wiring between the fuel probes and the
72.5 and 74.7 pF. connector (1Z4J1). If the tank unit capacitance
is incorrect, replace the tank unit.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
24. Release the TEST button.
• If the tank capacitance indication is not
between 72.5 and 74.7 pF, verify the tank unit 25. Energize the 28 VDC busses.
capacitance of the right hand tank fuel probes
in accordance with the Simmonds Precision
Fuel Quantity Gauging System manual 26. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7,
(BHT-430-CR&O-V.1, Chapter 28). If the tank CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12).
unit capacitance is correct, repair the wiring
between the fuel probes and the connector 27. Set the FUNCTION switch on the fuel gauging
(1Z4J1). If the tank unit capacitance is test set to ACFT.
incorrect, replace the tank unit.
RESULT:
• The left fuel quantity indicator reads 0 (zero).
18. Disconnect the adaptor harness box from the
connector (1Z4P1), the right side fuel probes CORRECTIVE ACTION:
connector, and the fuel test set. • If the left fuel quantity indicator does not read
0 (zero), set the zero adjust on the IIDS
19. Reconnect the right fuel quantity probes display.
connector (1Z4P1) located on the right side sump
plate. 28. Push in and hold the TEST button on the fuel
gauging test set.
20. Disconnect the left fuel quantity probes connector
(1Z3P1) located on the left side sump plate. 29. Set the RANGE switch on the fuel gauging test
set to 225.
21. Connect the Barfield 2643GA-430 adaptor
harness box between the connector (1Z3P1) and the 30. Adjust the 2544-FA capacitance simulator for an
fuel probes (1Z3) to the Barfield 2643-GA fuel gauging indication on the fuel gauging test set of 115 pF.
test set.

22. Connect the left connector of the adaptor harness
box to the fuel gauging test set.
32. Set the FUNCTION switch on the fuel gauging
23. Push in and hold the TEST button. test set to IND.
RESULT: RESULT:
• The tank capacitance indication is between • The left fuel quantity indicator reads 840 ±10
72.5 and 74.7 pF. pounds (381.02 ±4.54 kg), if wheel landing
gear is installed.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the tank capacitance indication is not
between 72.5 and 74.7 pF, verify the tank unit • If the left fuel quantity indicator does not
capacitance of the right hand tank fuel indicate 840 ±10 pounds (381.02 ±4.54 kg)
probes in accordance with the Simmonds when skid landing gear is installed or 640 ±10
Precision Fuel Quantity Gauging System pounds (290.30 ±4.54 kg) when wheel landing
95-00-00
1 MAY 2006 Rev. 12 Page 207
BHT-430-MM-10
gear is installed, set the full adjust on the IIDS 37. Disconnect the left plug of the adaptor harness
display. from the fuel test set.
33. Set the LOW LEVEL switch on the fuel gauging 38. Connect the right plug of the adaptor harness to
test set to DRY. the fuel test set.
RESULT: 39. Set the FUNCTION switch on the fuel gauging

test set to ACFT.
• The 1 FUEL QTY caution light comes on.
40. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7,
CORRECTIVE ACTION: CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12).
• If the 1 FUEL QTY caution light does not RESULT:

come on, is resistance between connector
1Z3J1 pins D and E between 650 and 1500 • The right fuel quantity indicator reads 0 (zero).
ohms and between 1Z3J1 pins D and F
between 360 and 440 ohms? If no, replace the CORRECTIVE ACTION:
thermistor on the left fuel probe. If yes, is
continuity measured between connector • If the right fuel quantity indicator does not read
1Z3P1 pin D and 1A1P3 pin 45, 1Z3P1 pin E 0 (zero), set the zero adjust on the IIDS
and 1A1P3 pin 47 and 1Z3P1 pin F and display.
1A1P3 pin 77? If no, repair or replace the
wiring. If yes, replace the IIDS. 41. Set the FUNCTION switch on the fuel gauging
test set to IND.
34. Set the LOW LEVEL switch on the fuel gauging
test set to WET. RESULT:
RESULT: • The right fuel quantity indicator reads 840 ±10

pounds (381.02 ±4.54 kg) if skid landing gear
• The 1 FUEL QTY caution light goes out. is installed, or 640 ±10 pounds (290.30 ±4.54
kg), if wheel landing gear is installed.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• If the 1 FUEL QTY caution light does not go
• If the right fuel quantity indicator does not
out, replace the IIDS.
indicate 840 ±10 pounds (381.02 ±4.54 kg)
when skid landing gear is installed, or 640 ±10
pounds (290.30 ±4.54 kg) when wheel landing
test set to THRU.
gear is installed, set the full adjust on the IIDS
display.
RESULT:
• The 1 FUEL QTY caution light comes on (if no test set to DRY.
fuel on helicopter).
RESULT:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• The FUEL QTY 2 caution light comes on.
• If the 1 FUEL QTY caution light does not
come on, replace the thermistor on the left fuel CORRECTIVE ACTION:
probe.
• If the FUEL QTY 2 caution light does not
36. Open the four (4) IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E, come on, is resistance between connector
CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12). 1Z4J1 pins D and E between 650 and 1500
95-00-00
Page 208 Rev. 12 1 MAY 2006
BHT-430-MM-10
ohms and between 1Z4J1 pins D and F 95-172. Fuel Quantity Indicating System —
between 360 and 440 ohms? If no, replace the Removal and Installation
thermistor on the right fuel probe. If yes, is
continuity measured between connector For tank probe maintenance, refer to Chapter 28.
1Z4P1 pin D and 1A1P4 pin 45, 1Z4P1 pin E
and 1A1P4 pin 47 and 1Z4P1 pin F and 95-173. Fuel Calibration
1A1P4 pin 77? If no, repair or replace the
wiring. If yes, replace the IIDS. Calibration of the LH fuel probe can only be carried out
on the LH IIDS screen.
test set to WET. Calibration of the RH fuel probe can only be carried
out on the RH IIDS screen.
RESULT:
The maintenance interconnect connector must be
connected to the connector (4J71) before any fuel
• The FUEL QTY 2 caution light goes out. calibration is carried out.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 95-174. Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-105

and -109 Only)
• If the FUEL QTY 2 caution light does not go
out, replace the IIDS.
test set to THRU.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
RESULT: 430-275-001-101 Maintenance

Harness Assembly
• The FUEL QTY 2 caution light comes on (if no
fuel in helicopter). 430-275-001-103 Maintenance
Harness Assembly
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NOTE
• If the FUEL QTY 2 caution light does not
come on, replace the thermistor on the right Use the existing drain valves to remove the
fuel probe. unusable fuel.
Defuel the helicopter in an area that

45. Open the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, decreases the risk of fire.
1. Defuel the helicopter.
46. Remove the 2643-GA fuel gauging test set,
2544-FA capacitance simulator, and 2643GA-430 2. Position the helicopter at 1.3° nose up and 0°
adaptor harness box. lateral. Use the pilot seat rail as a reference surface.
47. Reconnect the connectors, 1Z4P1 and 1Z3P1, to NOTE

the receptacle 1Z4J1 and 1Z3J1 respectively.
48. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, depletion.
3. Apply external 28 VDC electrical power.
49. Carry out a fuel calibration (paragraph 95-174 or
paragraph 95-175). 4. Set the FUEL TANK INTCON switch to OPEN.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
5. Add 110 pounds (49.9 kg) of fuel into the tank. a. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
Refer to Table 95-9 for the equivalent quantity in U.S. (Figure 95-32), select 8 – FUEL CALIBRATION using
gallons/liters as a function of the fuel temperature and the DN switch.
type.
b. Press the SEL switch.
NOTE c. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41),

External 28 VDC electrical power must be select RH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST
maintained; otherwise, fuel interconnect using the UP or DN switch.
valve will close.
d. Press the SEL switch.
6. Allow 45 minutes for the fuel level in the LH and
RH tanks to equalize. e. Using the UP or DN switch, adjust to 25
pounds (11.34 kg) indicated.
7. Note the fuel temperature on the start pages
displayed on the IIDS. f. Press the ACCEPT switch.
8. Connect the maintenance harness assembly

NOTE
430-275-001-101 or -103 to the connector (4J71) on
the side of the center pedestal. When fueling the tanks, allow 10 minutes
for the fuel to stabilize before noting the fuel
To perform the Left Hand Empty Calibration procedure quantity.
on the IIDS, use the following steps:
11. Start fueling the helicopter and note fuel quantity
indicated when LOW FUEL QTY caution light goes off.
switch and the C/C switch together and hold for 5
seconds to enter the LH maintenance screen. 12. Fill the helicopter fuel tanks to the maximum level
and note the total quantity of fuel required.
a. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
(Figure 95-32), select 8 – FUEL CALIBRATION using The total quantity of fuel required should be as follows
the DN switch. (excluding the 110 pounds (49.9 kg) added in step 6)
depending on the helicopter configuration:
b. Press the SEL switch.
• Wheel Gear — 173 ±3 U.S. gallons or 655
c. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41), ±12 liters.
select LH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST
using the UP or DN switch. • Skid Gear — 233 ±4 U.S. gallons or 882 ±15
liters.
d. Press the SEL switch.
13. If the fuel quantity is within or greater than
e. Using the UP or DOWN switch, adjust to 25 tolerances specified, proceed to step 14 in this
pounds (11.34 kg) indicated. procedure. If the fuel quantity is below the required
tolerance, refer to Chapter 28 for further inspection.
f. Press the ACCEPT switch.
To perform the Right Hand Empty Calibration NOTE

procedure on the IIDS, use the following steps: Although the display can be selected in kg,
the calibration is only available in lbs.
switch and TST switch simultaneously and hold for 5 To perform the Left Hand Full Calibration procedure on
seconds to enter the RH maintenance screen. the IIDS, use the following steps:
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
14. On the LH Fuel Calibration screen, select LH 18. De-energize the 28 VDC busses.
TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST using the UP
or DN switch. 19. Reposition the helicopter at normal ground
attitude.
a. Press the SEL switch.
b. Determine the full adjust value based on the

Table 95-8. Fuel Quantity — Full Indication
fuel system configuration (skid gear or wheel gear),
(P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only)
the type of the fuel being used, and the fuel
temperature (Table 95-10).
FUEL QUANTITY – FULL READING
c. Adjust fuel quantity readout to the full adjust
SKIDS WHEELS
value determined in step b by using the UP or DN
switch. 1679 pounds 1275 pounds
(6.8 lb/U.S. gal) JP-5 (6.8 lb/U.S. gal) JP-5
d. Press the ACCEPT switch.
1604 pounds 1218.8 pounds
e. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH (6.5 lb/U.S. gal) JP-4 (6.5 lb/U.S. gal) JP-4
maintenance screen.
To perform the Right Hand Full Calibration procedure

Table 95-9. Quantity Equivalent to 110 Pounds
on the IIDS, use the following steps:
(P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only)
15. On the RH Fuel Calibration screen, select RH QUANTITY EQUIVALENT TO
TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST using the UP FUEL
110 POUNDS IN U.S. GALLONS (L)
or DN switch. TEMP
(°C)
JET A/JET-8/JP-5 JET B/JP-4
a. Press the SEL switch.
-40 14.0 (53.0) 14.9 (56.4)
b. Determine the full adjust value based on the
fuel system configuration (skid gear or wheel gear), -30 14.2 (53.7) 15.0 (56.8)
the type of the fuel being used, and the fuel -20 14.3 (54.1) 15.1 (57.2)
temperature noted using Table 95-10.
-10 14.4 (54.5) 15.3 (57.9)
c. Adjust the fuel quantity readout to the full
adjust value determined in step b by using the UP or 0 14.6 (55.3) 15.4 (58.3)
DN switch. 10 14.7 (55.6) 15.6 (59.0)
d. Press the ACCEPT switch. 20 14.8 (56.0) 15.8 (59.8)

30 15.0 (56.8) 15.9 (60.2)
e. Press the RTN switch to exit the RH
maintenance screen. 40 15.1 (57.2) 16.1 (60.9)
16. Remove the maintenance harness assembly 50 15.2 (57.5) 16.2 (61.3)
60 15.4 (58.3) 16.4 (62.1)
17. Close the interconnect valve.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Table 95-10. Full Adjustment Values (P/N 430-375-001-105 and -109 Only)
FULL ADJUSTMENT PER SIDE (LB)

FUEL TEMP
SKID GEAR WHEEL GEAR
(°C)
JET A/JP-8/JP-5 JET B/JP-4 JET A/JP-8/JP-5 JET B/JP-4
-40 853 807 647 612
-30 845 799 641 606
-20 838 792 636 601
-10 831 784 631 595
0 824 776 625 589
10 816 767 620 583
20 809 761 614 577
30 802 753 608 571
40 795 745 603 566
50 787 738 598 560
60 778 730 592 554
• After -107, -111, or -113 IIDS reboot, and valid

95-175. Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107,
reference ratio numbers are unknown
-111, and -113 Only) — Fill Tank Method
• When in doubt as to the accuracy of the fuel
quantity indication
NOTE
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE Although the IIDS display can be selected
to display values in kilograms, calibration is
only available in pounds.
Assembly
1. Defuel the helicopter.
NOTE 2. Position the helicopter at 1.3° nose up and 0°

The Fill Tank Method fuel calibration lateral. Use the pilot seat rail as a reference surface.
procedure is to be used when one of the
following conditions applies: 3. Apply external 28 VDC electrical power.
• A fuel quantity probe has been replaced 4. Set the FUEL TANK INTCON switch to OPEN.
• When replacing a malfunctioning 5. Add 110 pounds (49.9 kg) of fuel into the tank.
430-375-001-105 or -109 IIDS with a Refer to Table 95-11 for the equivalent quantity in U.S.
replacement 430-375-001-107, -111, or -113 gallons/liters as a function of the fuel temperature and
IIDS type.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
20. Record the REF. RATIO number that displays on

NOTE the LH Fuel Calibration screen.
External 28 VDC electrical power must be
maintained; otherwise, fuel interconnect (LH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO = _________)
valve will close.
(LH TANK ZERO REF. QTY = _________)
6. Allow 45 minutes for the fuel level in the LH and
RH tanks to equalize. 21. Press the RTN switch.
7. Note the fuel temperature, displayed on the IIDS 22. Below the IIDS primary screen (RHS), press the
secondary screen start page. SEL and TST switches together and hold for 4
430-275-001 to the connector (4J71) on the side of the 23. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
center pedestal. (Figure 95-32), select 9-CONFIGURATION using the
DN switch.
9. Below the IIDS secondary screen (LHS), press

the SEL and C/C switches together and hold for 4
seconds to enter the LH Maintenance screen.
25. On the Configuration screen (Figure 95-44),
select 7-LANDING GEAR using the DN switch. Select
10. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen SKID or WHEEL as required.
(Figure 95-32), select 9-CONFIGURATION using the
DN switch.
11. Press the SEL switch. 27. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
(Figure 95-32), use the DN switch to select 8-FUEL
12. On the Configuration screen (Figure 95-44), CALIBRATION.
SKID or WHEEL as required. 28. Press the SEL switch.
13. Press the MENU 1 switch. 29. On the Fuel Calibration screen, select RH TANK
FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST using the UP or DN
switch.
CALIBRATION. 30. Press the SEL switch.
31. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches, adjust

the MEAS. QTY to 35 pounds (15.88 kg) in the FILL
TANK METHOD field.
16. On the Fuel Calibration screen, select LH TANK
FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST using the UP or DN 32. Press the ACCEPT switch.
switch.
33. Record the REF. RATIO number that displays on
17. Press the SEL switch. the RH Fuel Calibration screen.
18. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches, adjust (RH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO = _________)
the MEAS. QTY to 35 pounds (15.88 kg) in the FILL
TANK METHOD field. 34. Press the ACCEPT switch.
19. Press the ACCEPT switch. 35. Press the RTN switch.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10

NOTE
After fuelling the tanks, wait 10 minutes for 47. Record the REF. RATIO number that displays on
the fuel to stabilize before recording the fuel the LH Fuel Calibration screen.
quantity.
36. Start fuelling the helicopter and record the fuel (LH TANK FULL REF. RATIO = _________)
quantity indicated when the LOW FUEL QTY caution
light extinguishes. 48. Press the RTN switch.
37. Fill the helicopter fuel tanks to the maximum level

49. Below the IIDS primary screen (RHS), press the
and record the total quantity of fuel required.
SEL and TST switches together and hold for 4
The total quantity of fuel required should be as follows
(excluding the 110 pounds (49.9 kg) added in step 5),
depending on the helicopter configuration: 50. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
(Figure 95-32), select 8-FUEL CALIBRATION using
the DN switch.
• Wheel Gear — 177 ±3 U.S. gallons or 670
±12 liters
• Skid Gear — 231 ±4 U.S. gallons or 874
±15 liters
52. On the Fuel Calibration screen, select RH FUEL
TANK QUANTITY FULL ADJUST using the UP or DN
38. If the quantity of fuel required is within or greater switch.
than the tolerances specified, proceed to step 39. If
the fuel quantity is below the required tolerance, refer
to Chapter 28 for further inspection. 53. Press the SEL switch.
39. Below the IIDS secondary screen (LHS), press 54. Determine the full adjust value based on the fuel
the SEL and C/C switches together and hold for 4 system configuration, type of fuel being used, and the
seconds to enter the LH Maintenance screen. fuel temperature (Table 95-12).
40. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen 55. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches, adjust
(Figure 95-32), select 8-FUEL CALIBRATION using the MEAS. QTY (in the FILL TANK METHOD field) to
the DN switch. the value determined in step 54.

42. On the Fuel Calibration screen, select LH FUEL

TANK QUANTITY FULL ADJUST using the UP or DN 57. Record the REF. RATIO number that displays on
switch. the RH Fuel Calibration screen.
43. Press the SEL switch. (RH TANK FULL REF. RATIO = _________)
44. Determine the full adjust value based on the fuel 58. Press the RTN switch.
system configuration, type of fuel being used, and the
fuel temperature (Table 95-12).
59. Remove maintenance harness assembly
430-275-001 from the helicopter.
45. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches, adjust
the MEAS. QTY (in the FILL TANK METHOD field) to
the value determined in step 44. 60. Remove external power from the helicopter.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Table 95-11. Quantity Equivalent to 110 Pounds

(P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 Only)
QUANTITY EQUIVALENT TO
FUEL
110 LB IN U.S. GALLONS (LITERS)
TEMP
(°C)
-40 15.5 (58.5) 16.4 (61.9)

-30 15.6 (59.0) 16.5 (62.5)
-20 15.7 (59.6) 16.7 (63.1)
-10 15.9 (60.1) 16.8 (63.7)
0 16.0 (60.6) 17.0 (64.3)
10 16.2 (61.2) 17.2 (65.0)
20 16.3 (61.7) 17.3 (65.6)
30 16.5 (62.3) 17.5 (66.3)
40 16.6 (62.8) 17.7 (66.9)
50 16.8 (63.4) 17.9 (67.6)
60 16.9 (64.0) 18.1 (68.3)
Table 95-12. Full Adjustment Values (P/N 430-375-001-107, -111, and -113 Only)
FULL ADJUSTMENT PER SIDE (LB)

FUEL TEMP
SKID GEAR WHEEL GEAR
(°C)
JET A/JP-8/JP-5 JET B/JP-4 JET A/JP-8/JP-5 JET B/JP-4
-40 876 829 664 628

-30 869 821 659 623
-20 861 813 653 617
-10 854 806 647 611
0 846 798 642 605
10 839 790 636 599
20 831 782 630 593
30 824 774 625 587
40 816 766 619 581
50 809 759 613 575
60 801 751 608 569
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
However, valid reference ratio numbers

Table 95-13. Fuel Density must be known prior to proceeding with this
method. If these numbers are unknown, or
FUEL DENSITY (LB) PER believed to be inaccurate, refer to
FUEL paragraph 95-175 for the fill tank method.
U.S. GALLON
TEMP
(°C) 1. Obtain valid reference ratio numbers from
records.
-40 7.112 6.728
(LH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO = _________)
-30 7.051 6.664 (RH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO = _________)
-20 6.990 6.601
(LH TANK FULL REF. RATIO = _________)
-10 6.929 6.537 (RH TANK FULL REF. RATIO = _________)
0 6.868 6.474
2. Apply external 28 VDC electrical power.
10 6.807 6.410
20 6.747 6.347
430-275-001 to the connector (4J71) on the side of the
30 6.686 6.283 center pedestal.
40 6.625 6.219 4. Below the IIDS secondary screen (LHS), press

50 6.564 6.156 the SEL and C/C switches together and hold for 4
seconds to enter the LH Maintenance screen.
60 6.503 6.092
95-175A. Fuel Calibration (P/N 430-375-001-107,
DN switch.
-111, and -113 Only) — Manual Edit
Method

SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED select 7-LANDING GEAR using the DN switch. Select
SKID or WHEEL as required.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Assembly 9. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen
CALIBRATION.
NOTE
The Manual Edit Method fuel calibration
procedure is to be used when one of the 11. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41),
following conditions applies: select LH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST
using the UP or DN switch.
• When replacing a malfunctioning
430-375-001-107, -111, or -113 IIDS with a 12. Press the SEL switch.
replacement 430-375-001-107, -111, or -113
IIDS
13. Press the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches together
to advance to the Manual Edit Method REF. RATIO
• After IIDS reboot field.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
14. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches 31. Press the SEL switch.
separately, enter the LH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO
value. 32. Press the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches together
15. Press the ACCEPT switch. field.
16. Press the MENU 2 switch. 33. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches
separately, enter the RH TANK ZERO REF. RATIO
17. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41), value.
select LH TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST
using the UP or DN switch. 34. Press the ACCEPT switch.
18. Press the SEL switch. 35. Press the MENU 2 switch.
19. Press the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches together 36. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41),
to advance to the Manual Edit Method REF. RATIO select RH TANK FUEL QUANTITY FULL ADJUST
field. using the UP or DN switch.
20. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches 37. Press the SEL switch.
separately, enter the LH TANK FULL REF. RATIO
value.
38. Press the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches together
21. Press the ACCEPT switch. field.
22. Press the RTN switch. 39. Using the NEXT DIGIT and +1 switches
separately, enter the RH TANK FULL REF. RATIO
23. Below the IIDS primary screen (RHS), press the value.
SEL and C/C switches together and hold for 4
seconds to enter the RH Maintenance screen. 40. Press the ACCEPT switch.
24. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen 41. Press the RTN switch.
DN switch.
42. Remove maintenance harness assembly
430-275-001 from the helicopter.
SKID or WHEEL as required. 95-176. FUEL TEMPERATURE INDICATING
SYSTEM
The Fuel Temperature is displayed on the IIDS Start
page in degrees Celsius (Figure 95-29). The Fuel
28. On the IIDS Maintenance Functions screen Temperature is displayed as a digital display.
CALIBRATION. The fuel temperature indicating system provides the
fuel temperature from a temperature bulb (1MT12),
29. Press the SEL switch. mounted on the right side of the main fuel tank, to the
IIDS.
30. On the Fuel Calibration screen (Figure 95-41),
select RH TANK FUEL QUANTITY ZERO ADJUST Fuel temperature is shown on the IIDS start screen,
using the UP or DN switch. and is displayed in degrees Celsius in a range of 50 to
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
100°C. Figure 95-61 represents the IIDS fuel RESULT:

indicating system block diagram.
• The fuel temperature is approximately the
The fuel temperature indicating system consists of: temperature of the fuel tank.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
• A fuel temperature bulb (1MT12) located on
the right side of main fuel tank.
• If the IIDS fuel temperature reads an improper
value, is the resistance between pin A and B
• A fuel temperature indicating system of 1MT12 between 74.24 ohms and 128.85
displayed on the start page of the IIDS ohms? If not, replace the fuel temperature
secondary display (Figure 95-29). bulb (1MT12) (refer to Chapter 28 for the fuel
temperature probe removal procedure). If the
Fuel temperature bulb (1MT12) resistance is between 74.24 ohms and 128.85
ohms, is there continuity between 1MT12P1
The fuel temperature sensor (1MT12) is a variable pin A and 1A1P3 pin 37, and 1MT12P1 pin B,
resistance bulb. The resistance of the temperature and 1A1P3 pin 36? If there is no continuity,
sensor varies with the temperature applied to it. See repair or replace the wiring. If there is
Table 95-7 for resistance versus temperature values. continuity, replace the IIDS.
95-178. GENERATOR DC AMMETER INDICATING

Fuel temperature indicating system SYSTEM
During start, the fuel temperature digital readout is The IIDS provides generator ammeter displays for No.
shown on the IIDS secondary display start page. The 1 and No. 2 DC generators. These are digital displays
temperature can be displayed in degrees Celsius in a that appear on the secondary screen page 2
range of -50 to 100°C. The IIDS fuel temperature (Figure 95-28) and the start page (Figure 95-29) of the
indicating system uses the analog signal from the fuel IIDS.
temperature probe (1MT12).
The generator DC ammeter indicating system consists
95-177. Fuel Temperature Indicating System — of:
Operational Check
• A 200 amp 100 mV, generator 1 shunt (2R1)
located on the left side aft face of station 340.
SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED • A 200 amp 100 mV, generator 2 shunt (2R2)
located on the right side aft face of station
340.
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Fluke 8060A or Multimeter • Generator DC ammeter indication displayed

Equivalent on the IIDS secondary page 2 and start page.
Generator 1 and 2 Shunts
NOTE The individual generator loads are monitored by the

generator shunt 1 and 2, connected to the ground side
of each generator. A voltage drop is measured across
the shunt and the resultant signal is supplied to the
depletion.
IIDS ammeter display.
1. Fill the fuel tanks before you start the operational
DC Generator Ammeter Indicating System
check.
The IIDS DC generator ammeter digital readout
2. Set the IIDS secondary start page. provides a range from 0 to 420 amps to allow you to
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
monitor amperage during the cross-start sequence 95-183. Generator DC Voltmeter Indicating System
when generator loads can reach 300 amps. — Troubleshooting
Continuous load operation is 0 to 180 amps from 0 to
5000 feet. The readout changes to yellow at 150 Troubleshooting of the IIDS generator voltmeter is
amps. The readout changes to red above 180 amps. done during electrical power system troubleshooting
The maximum continuous limitation decreases by 2 (Chapter 96).
amps per 1000 feet above 5000 feet altitude up to
20,000 feet.
95-184. BATTERY VOLTMETER INDICATING
SYSTEM
95-179. Generator DC Ammeter Indicating System
— Operational Check
The IIDS battery voltmeter display is a digital readout
(Figure 95-28) that displays the battery voltage in
The IIDS generator ammeters are operationally tested volts.
as part of their respective generator power system
(Chapter 96).
The IIDS provides display on the secondary screen
page 2 (Figure 95-28) and the start page
95-180. Generator DC Ammeter Indicating System (Figure 95-29). The voltmeter range is from 0 to 40
— Troubleshooting volts. This voltage is read directly from the battery.
Troubleshooting of the generator ammeter is done 95-185. Battery Voltmeter Indicating System —
during electrical power system troubleshooting Operational Check
(Chapter 96).
The battery voltmeter indicating system is

95-181. GENERATOR DC VOLTMETER operationally tested as part of the battery power
INDICATING SYSTEM system operational check (Chapter 96).
The IIDS generator voltmeter displays are digital 95-186. Battery Voltmeter Indicating System —
readouts that individually display each generator Troubleshooting
output voltage in volts on the IIDS secondary screen
page 2 (Figure 95-28) and start page (Figure 95-29).
Troubleshooting of the IIDS battery voltmeter is done
during electrical power system troubleshooting (refer
The generator output voltage is monitored at the to Chapter 96).
generator side of the No. 1 and No. 2 generator
contactors (2K5 and 2K6), respectively.
95-187. AC INVERTER VOLTMETER INDICATING
SYSTEM
The generator voltmeter displays are digital readouts
that individually display each generator output voltage
The AC inverter voltmeter displays are digital readouts
in volts. The IIDS provides these displays on the
(Figure 95-29) that individually display each 115 VAC
secondary screen page 2 (Figure 95-28) and start
inverter output in volts.
page (Figure 95-29). The voltmeter range is from 0 to
40 volts.
The IIDS provides displays for the No. 1 and No. 2
inverter voltages on the secondary screen page 2
95-182. Generator DC Voltmeter Indicating System
(Figure 95-28). The voltmeter range is from 0 to 121
volts. The voltage reading is taken from the inverter
side of the AC bus relay. If only one inverter is
The IIDS generator voltmeters are operationally tested installed, the No. 2 inverter voltmeter indicator can be
as part of their respective generator power system de-selected using the configuration page of the IIDS
(Chapter 96). maintenance screen.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-188. AC Inverter Voltmeter Indicating System

Table 95-14. Outside Air Temperature
The AC voltmeter indicating system is operationally Indication (°C) Versus Bulb Resistance (Ohms)
tested as part of the AC power operational check — For Reference Only
(Chapter 96).
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE TOLERANCE
95-189. AC Inverter Voltmeter Indicating System (°C) (OHMS) (OHMS)
— Troubleshooting
-40 963.13 ±2.4
Troubleshooting of the IIDS AC voltmeter indicating -30 1020.47 ±2.6
system is done during electrical AC power system
troubleshooting (Chapter 96). -20 1079.00 ±2.7
-10 1138.82 ±2.8

95-190. OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE (OAT)
INDICATING SYSTEM 0 1200.00 ±3.0
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is a digital readout 10 1262.64 ±3.2

(Figure 95-28) that displays temperature in degrees
20 1326.85 ±3.3
Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit selection
from the parameter set-up page of the maintenance 30 1392.71 ±3.5
screen.
40 1460.33 ±3.7
The OAT is displayed on the IIDS secondary display
50 1529.82 ±3.8
page 1 and start page (Figure 95-28 and
Figure 95-29). The OAT can be displayed in either 60 1601.30 ±4.0
degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.
70 1674.87 ±4.2
The temperature range is from -70 to 105°C. A
temperature signal is supplied from a temperature
95-191. Changing OAT Parameters
bulb (18RT1) located below the forward fuselage skin
on the left side. The resistance of the temperature bulb
varies with the temperature applied to it. See To change the OAT temperature parameters from
Table 95-14 for resistance versus temperature values. Celsius to Fahrenheit or Fahrenheit to Celsius, do as
follows:
1. Connect the maintenance interconnect connector

to the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
pedestal.

to enter the LH Maintenance screen.

(Figure 95-32), select 7-PARAMETER SET-UP using
the DN switch.
4. On the Parameter Set-up screen (Figure 95-40),

select 3-OAT (DEG C/F) using the UP or DN switch.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
6. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH Maintenance Table 95-7 for reference only.) If the
screen. resistance is correct, is there continuity
between 18RT1P1 pin A and 1A1P3 pin 38,
7. Remove the maintenance interconnect connector and between 18RT1P1 pin B and 1A1P3 pin
from the connector (4J71). 39? If there is continuity, replace the IDS. If
there is no continuity, repair the wiring.
95-192. Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Indicating
System — Operational Check 95-193. OAT Bulb — Removal
1. Disconnect the connector (18RT1P1) from the

Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe (Figure 95-62).
2. Loosen the attaching hardware and protect the
NUMBER NOMENCLATURE OAT bulb.
Standard Thermometer 3. Carefully remove the entire assembly as a unit

(Calibrated in °C) from the helicopter.
Fluke 8060A or Multimeter

95-194. OAT Bulb — Inspection
Equivalent
Inspect the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) assembly
for a cracked or damaged temperature bulb, electrical
NOTE
cable, or other evidence of physical damage.
maintenance procedures to prevent battery 95-195. OAT Bulb — Installation
depletion.
1. Gently work the new Outside Air Temperature
1. Put the standard thermometer near the Outside (OAT) indicator into the approximate installed position.
Air Temperature (OAT) bulb on the underside of the
helicopter.
2. Connect the electrical connector (18RT1P1).
2. Tape the thermometer to the helicopter close to 3. Perform an operational check to ensure proper
the OAT probe. operation (paragraph 95-192).
3. Let enough time pass for the standard 95-196. DIGITAL CLOCK INDICATING SYSTEM
thermometer to stabilize in its location.
The IIDS provides the clock function (Figure 95-28)
4. Read the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) on the and has the capability to display GMT, local time (LC),
IIDS secondary page 1. elapsed time (ET), and elapsed time countdown
(ETD). Clock setting is accomplished using the
RESULT: function keys through the PARAMETER SET-UP
menu in the maintenance pages.
• The OAT digital readout indicates the ambient
OAT (standard thermometer) ±1.5°C. The time modes are accessed through the function
keys (Figure 95-31). The C/S key accesses the
CORRECTIVE ACTION: various clock operating modes in the following order:
GMT, LC, ET, ETD, and GMT.
• If the OAT reads an incorrect value, is
resistance between pin A and B of OAT bulb • The C/C key starts and resets the Elapsed
(18RT1) between 963.13 ±2.4 ohms and Time (ET) counters
1674.87 ±4.2 ohms? If the resistance is not
between 963.13 ±2.4 ohms and 1674.87 ±4.2 • C/C starts the ET counting up, and pressing
ohms, replace the OAT bulb. (Refer to C/C again stops and resets the timer to zero
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
Figure 95-62. Outside Air Temperature Bulb Installation
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
• Both the C/S and C/C keys, when pressed 4. On the Parameter Set-up screen (Figure 95-40),
simultaneously, set the ET countdown timer select 1-TIME using the UP or DN switch.
once ETD is selected
• Once entered into the countdown set mode,
the first digit flashes to indicate which digit is
set using the C/C key 6. Select CHANGE LOCAL TIME.
• The C/S key is then used to go to the next 7. Press the SEL switch.
digit to be set
8. Using the UP or DN switch, enter the correct
• Once the last digit is set, the C/S key returns hour.
to the ETD mode

• The C/C key is then used to start the
countdown;tThe display starts counting up
once the counter reaches zero 10. Using the UP or DN switch, enter the correct
minutes.
The ET mode provides for minute and second display
up to 59:59 (MM:SS) and transfers to hours and 11. Press the SEL switch.
minutes after that point up to 99:59 (HH:MM). An
external mounted battery pack is provided to keep the
clock circuit operational after the main helicopter 12. To change GMT time, press the MENU 2 switch
power is off. The time display is in digital format with and repeat step 8 and step 9.
the proper annunciation of mode selected. The start
timer displayed on the start page uses the start mode 13. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH Maintenance
logic of the FADEC-ECU (from either engine No. 1 or screen.
No. 2) in order to start and stop the readout. If the IIDS
is removed from the helicopter the digital clock will
have to be re-programmed. 14. Remove the maintenance interconnect connector
Battery pack (1A70)
95-198. Setting the Date
A rechargeable 9-volt battery pack located below the
right nose bay shelf powers the clock indicating to the 1. Connect the maintenance interconnect connector
system when IIDS normal power is removed. The to the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
battery requires 16 hours to fully recharge. pedestal.
95-197. Setting the Time

1. Connect the maintenance interconnect connector to enter the LH Maintenance screen.
to the connector (4J71) on the left side of the center
pedestal.
2. Below the IIDS secondary screen, press the SEL the DN switch.
to enter the LH maintenance screen.
4. On the Parameter Set-up screen (Figure 95-40),
select 2-DATE using the UP or DN switch.
the DN switch. 5. Press the SEL switch.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
95-200. Clock Battery Power Supply —

NOTE Operational Check
The date must be entered in the
YY-MM-DD format. Do an electrical leak and capacity test on the battery
power supply (BP-9) every 6 months or whenever the
6. Using the UP or DN switch, enter the correct unit fails.
year, month, and day.
1. Electrical Leak Test
8. Deleted. SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED
9. Deleted. NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
Multimeter
10. Press the RTN switch to exit the LH Maintenance
screen.
11. Remove the maintenance interconnect connector NOTE

from the connector (4J71). Do not use the voltage reading between the
battery case and the terminals as a criteria
95-199. Digital Clock Indicating System — for rejection. Only the current flow is the
Operational Check determining criteria.
a. Disconnect the wires from the clock battery

NOTE power supply (1A70) and isolate them from the
Make sure that the battery pack (1A70) is electrical ground.
fully recharged before you do the test that
follows. b. Remove the clock battery power supply from
the helicopter.
1. Set the digital clock on IIDS to the correct time.
c. Set the range selector of the multimeter to the
2. Open the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, 500 milliamp range or higher.
CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12) for a minimum of 60
seconds. d. Put the multimeter’s positive lead on the
positive lead of the battery (1A70) and momentarily
3. Close the four IIDS circuit breakers (CB-E7, touch the multimeter’s negative lead to any exposed
CB-E8, CB-E11, and CB-E12). metal on the battery case.
RESULT: e. Connect the multimeter’s negative lead to the

battery case.
• Make sure that the clock has not reset and
that it displays the correct time. f. Decrease the multimeter’s current range until
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
RESULT:
• If the clock does reset and does not display
the correct time, replace the battery (1A70). • The multimeter reads less than 10 milliamps.
95-00-00
BHT-430-MM-10
CORRECTIVE ACTION: 2. Battery Capacity Test
• If the multimeter’s reading shows a current

measurement greater than 10 milliamps, CAUTION
reject the battery.
g. Disconnect both multimeter’s leads from the DO NOT LET THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
battery’s positive terminal and the battery case. DROP BELOW 9 VOLTS. PERMANANT
DAMAGE TO THE BATTERY DUE TO
h. Set the multimeter’s range selector to the 500
milliampere range or higher. Put the multimeter’s a. Charge the battery with a constant current at a
negative lead on the negative terminal of the battery rate of 120 milliamps for 14 to 16 hours.
(1A70) and momentarily touch the multimeter’s
positive lead to any exposed metal on the battery b. Wait 2 hours after charging.
case.
c. Carry out a timed discharge through a 15 ohm
RESULT: resistor until either 51 minutes passes or the battery
voltage drops to 9 volts.
• The multimeter reads less than 10 milliamps. d. If the battery provides 51 minutes of discharge
time, do step 1, substep f and step 1, substep g.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
e. If the battery does not provide 51 minutes of
discharge time with the voltage above 9 volts, do
• If the multimeter reading shows a current step 1, substep f, and then go to step 1, substep h.
measurement greater than 10 milliamps,
reject the battery. f. Permit the battery to cool down for a minimum
of 2 hours.
i. Connect the multimeter’s positive lead to the
battery case. g. Recharge the battery at a constant rate of
120 milliamps for 14 to 16 hours and then do step 2,
substep a.
j. Decrease the multimeter’s current range until
any current flow is readable. h. Recharge the battery at a constant rate of
120 milliamps for 24 hours.
RESULT:
i. Carry out a timed discharge through a 15 ohm
resistor until either 51 minutes passes or the battery
• The multimeter reads less than 10 milliamps. voltage drops to 9 volts.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: j. If the battery provides 51 minutes of discharge

time, do step 1, substep f and step 1, substep g.
• If the multimeter reading shows a current
k. If the battery does not provide 51 minutes of
measurement greater than 10 milliamps,
discharge time with the voltage above 9 volts, reject
reject the battery.
the battery.
k. Disconnect both of the multimeter’s leads from l. Install the clock battery power supply (1A70)
the battery’s positive terminal and the battery case. and reconnect the wires to the battery.
95-00-00
ECCN EAR99 1 SEP 2009 Rev. 17 Page 225/226

Chapter 95 - Instrument System: BHT-430-MM-10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 95 - Instrument System: BHT-430-MM-10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BHT-430-MM-10

CHAPTER 95 — INSTRUMENT SYSTEM

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-1 Instrument System ......................................................................... 95-00-00 9

PITOT STATIC SYSTEM

95-14 Pitot Static Systems ....................................................................... 95-00-00 15

FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM

95-35 Flight Instruments .......................................................................... 95-00-00 37

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-36 Basic Helicopter (Electro- mechanical Instruments) ................. 95-00-00 37

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-74 Navigation Instruments .................................................................. 95-00-00 71

INTEGRATED INSTRUMENT DISPLAY SYSTEM (IIDS)

95-92 Integrated Instrument Display System (IIDS)................................. 95-00-00 81

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-112 Power Assurance Check Screen ...................................... 95-00-00 110

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-147 Gas Producer Tachometer (NG) Indicating System

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT)

Paragraph Chapter/Section Page

95-177 Fuel Temperature Indicating System

95-1 Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (E/M and Kits) .......................................... 13

95-10 Encoding Altimeter.............................................................................................. 42

95-57 MGT Indicating System Block Diagram .............................................................. 188

95-1 Example of Deviations with Compensator Set to Null Effects............................. 74

95-1. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM screws accessible on the panel face attach

Examine the instrument for the conditions that follow:

CAUTION 1. Hardware that is loose, missing, or incorrectly

REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER. 2. Scratches or cracks on cover glasses.

3. Incorrectly attached instruments.

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO DELICATE

95-5. INSTRUMENT SYSTEM — INSTALLATION 95-7. Glareshield — Removal

REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER.

2. Make sure that the front edge of the glareshield is

3. Put each fastener in position.

95-10. Pilot Instrument Panel — Removal

CAUTION REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL POWER.

1. Disconnect and remove the ADI and HSI or RMI,

4. Disconnect the quick release pitot-static

5. Carefully move the pilot instrument panel towards

Figure 95-1. Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (E/M and Kits)

Figure 95-2. Instrument Panel Dual Configuration (EFIS and Kits)

PITOT STATIC SYSTEM

95-14. PITOT STATIC SYSTEMS 95-17. COPILOT PITOT SYSTEM

Figure 95-3. Pitot System

Figure 95-4. Static System

1. Examine each pitot tube and static port for a

33410S-70-4 Universal Test Adapter,

2. Connect the applicable test set hoses of the pitot

13. Leave the pressure source valve open until the

17. Close the pressure vent valve.

9. Pressurize the pressure tank on the test set until

THE VALVES ON THE TEST SET ARE

21. Slowly adjust the cross-bleed valve to put the

35. Lightly tap the helicopter and test set airspeed

38. Close the pressure vent valve.

28. Close all five valves on the test set. NOTE

30. Pressurize the pressure tank on the test set until